JP6741816B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine for playing a game using a gaming ball. In this pachinko game machine, it is known that a display part for displaying an image is provided with a movable accessory that can be moved between the liquid crystal display area and the liquid crystal display area (for example, see Patent Document 1). ).

JP, 2010-214010, A

As such a conventional game machine, there is also one that gives a big hit notice.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can give a more varied big hit announcement.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a specific game state determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific game state advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific game. Controls the effect content determination means for determining the content of the effect for notifying the determination result of the state determination means, the effect display means for executing the effect determined by the effect content determination means, and the effect executed by the effect display means. a presentation control means for a specific display determining means for determining whether to display on the effect display means specific display (plate a) to suggest that the contents of the effect to be executed by the effect display means is changed, The production being executed is capable of changing the content of the production based on the specific display, and the production content determining means is one of a plurality of expected degree types consisting of a plurality of stages executable in one game. It is possible to determine each of the expected degree types to be executed, the specific display is defined corresponding to each of the expected degree types, and the effect control means displays the specific display by the specific display determination means. Is not determined, and if the expected degree type determined by the effect content determination means is an expected degree type (pseudo-link) of a specific stage (three times), the expected degree type of the specific stage is set. When the corresponding display is executed and the specific display is displayed, and when the expected degree type determined by the effect content determination means is the expected degree type of the specific stage, based on the specific display Without changing the content of the effect to the kind of degree of expectation (first time) lower than the kind of expectation degree of the specific stage (pseudo-run), and then changing the content of the effect to the degree of expectation of the specific step based on the specific display. It has a configuration that can be changed to different types.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot announcement (announcement of transition to a specific gaming state).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can give a more varied jackpot notice.

It is an appearance perspective view of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of a game board in the game machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower side movable effect member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the movable body and movable member of the lower movable effect member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the movable body and movable member of the lower movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right back side. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention expands the movable portion at the standby position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member is in the movable position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the lower movable effect member is in the movable position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the movable portion expands at the standby position of the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the movable portion expands in the movable position of the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the lower movable production member in the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention expands in the waiting position. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is expanded in the movable position. It is a front view of the winning opening unit and the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the winning opening unit in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the winning opening unit in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the circumference of a back cover and a lower movable effect member in a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is a front view of the winning port unit and the lower movable effect member enlarged at the standby position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a lower movable effect member having a different structure of a winning opening unit and a movable portion in a gaming machine according to an embodiment (modification) of the present invention. It is a front view of the state where the lower movable effect member having a different structure of the winning opening unit and the movable portion in the gaming machine according to the embodiment (modification) of the present invention is enlarged at the standby position. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper side movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper side movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the case of the upper movable effect member, the fixed base, and the rear movable base of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the front right side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the case of the upper movable effect member, the fixed base, and the rear movable base of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the right rear side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front movable base of the upper movable production member, the movable blade rack, and the decoration member from the right front side in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side movable base, the vane movable rack, and the decoration member of the upper side movable production member in the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right back. It is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the movable position. It is a schematic front view of the front movable base and the movable blade rack in the case where the upper movable effect member is in the standby position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of the front movable base and the blade movable rack when the upper movable effect member is in the movable position in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of the illumination board when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a schematic front view of the electric decoration board when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the movable position. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XL-XL of FIG. 36. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow XLI-XLI of FIG. 36. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view of the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the movable blade rack in a state where the upper movable effect member has moved to the movable position from the state of FIG. 41. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XLIII-XLIII of FIG. 36. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the movable blade rack in a state where the upper movable effect member has moved to the movable position from the state of FIG. 43. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the rear movable base, front movable base, and blade movable rack in the case where the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the back movable base, front movable base, and vane movable rack when the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the movable position. It is explanatory drawing which showed the state which the upper side movable production member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention moves to a movable position from a standby position in order of (a)-(c). It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention has moved to the movable position. It is the transition figure which shows the game state and the production mode of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening/closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening/closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a part of a sub effect content determination table of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a part of a sub effect content determination table of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a timer updating process of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design related switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting mouth switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the 1st special winning a prize oral switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design control processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design memory check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design decision processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation time management processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design display time management processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit start interval management processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design game ending processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the production pattern decision processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing in ST mode of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the flowchart which shows the story production pattern change processing in ST of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the item pre-reading production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the item use production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the plate A use production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the plate B use production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the plate C use production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the item acquisition production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit production pattern decision processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit start production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the hit end production processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of production of a live bonus of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production of a live bonus of a game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a screen display at the time of normal of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story section of ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story section of ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the related story per effect pattern for SP bonuses of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing a screen display example of the item prefetch effect of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a screen display example of the item prefetch effect of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a screen display example of the item prefetch effect of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the hit production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram showing a story effect table group of the gaming machine according to an embodiment (modification) of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the main fluctuation time determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a special winning opening opening and closing pattern of a game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is the flowchart which shows the special design control processing of the game machine which relates to the other execution form of this invention. It is a block diagram of the left movable effect member and the right movable effect member of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the front view of the game board which shows the state where the left movable production member and the right movable production member in the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention move to movable position. It is a front view of a game board in a game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball passage unit in the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention from the right front. It is a front view of a ball passage unit in a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a CXXVI-CXXVI direction arrow sectional view of FIG. It is a CXXVII-CXXVII direction arrow sectional view of FIG. It is a front view of a game board in a game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.

1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) detachably provided with a game area in which a game ball as a game medium can roll down. A main body frame 2 having a main body frame base plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base), and a front frame base plate 3a (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening portion) provided with an opening 3h through which the game board 1 can be viewed (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) A front frame 3 which is also rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (on the side of the player), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display ( 3) includes a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (illustrated in the figure) rotatably supported by the main frame 2 at the rear side of the main frame 2 (opposite player side). Omitted) and.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to island equipment (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6, and in this state, the rear frame is , It is housed in the outer frame 6 and thus not shown.

The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame constituent members provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decoration member 15, left decoration member 16) and the like. It should be noted that the front frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members forming the front frame 3. Further, in the dish unit 8, each cover member (upper dish upper cover 8a, lower dish cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a through a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, the front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. It is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side with the front frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 2. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both sides above the front frame opening 3h.

Further, a decoration member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 having a patrol lamp accessory described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decoration member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decoration member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a) are provided.

Inside the right decoration member 15 and the left decoration member 16, a light emitting means (for example, a lamp/LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp/LED 27 passes through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 and is sensed by the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as radiant light, diffused light, or the like having an excellent appearance. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, a dish unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 is provided with an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper part of the lower plate body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 is an upper plate body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the outer frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate body 17p, The upper plate 17 is provided with an upper plate decoration member for improving the aesthetic appearance. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with the upper plate left decoration 17a, the upper plate front decoration 17c, etc. so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape that is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side and toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

In the front frame base plate 3a, a payout opening 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ), and a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage of a game ball that is paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) and a ball passage cover that forms a ball passage by connecting the discharge port and the supply port 21 (illustrated) Is omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout opening 20, while the game ball is paid out, but the more the game ball stays near the payout opening 20, the upper plate 17 Is full, or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged from the outlet through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. Sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration of the front surface of the gaming machine, and a plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c for decoration of the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the external design of the gaming machine is enhanced, and the interest of the player is improved.

On the upper plate upper cover 8a, a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player's operation (press operation, rotation operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the pressing operation button 9A is projected in the vertical direction from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A is projected. The operation unit 9 is shown in which the jog dial 9B is arranged.

Regarding the front frame 3, on the surface (front face) thereof on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, for example, an illegal wire such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member invades and various components constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the rear side of the portion are subjected to an unauthorized act by the unauthorized member.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraud, a cover member (not shown) having a wiring holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member intrudes. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function, which has three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention. Therefore, it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Is eliminated, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The body frame constituent members include the launching device 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members that form the body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for placing the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the front surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b provided on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the front surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of, and is configured to include a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

A cutout 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. The launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they are integrated continuously with each other.

The firing handle 26b is provided with a support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion, and is rotatable in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and is provided in the support portion. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operating member) for ON/OFF operating the firing stop switch, and a handle grip 26d are provided so as to cover the opening. And a handle cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased/decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time causes the upper plate 17 to be stored. The played game ball is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the firing drive device is controlled to be stopped, whereby the firing of the game ball can be stopped.

In this embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout/firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) is provided for elastically biasing the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. By rotating the handle grip 26d clockwise, the game ball is fired.

Further, when the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the projection of the handle grip 26d (not shown) pushes the firing stop button 26e, so that the firing of the game ball is stopped.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown) It is known to increase or decrease the launch intensity of the game ball by changing the electric power supplied to (not shown). In the launching device 26 of the present embodiment, the turning operation of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b. A firing spring (not shown) which is not shown in the figure and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b to strengthen or weaken the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring, thereby playing the game ball. The firing intensity of is increased or decreased.

The speaker 10c is provided at the center of the lower portion of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). Has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and a rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) is provided behind the game board 1. There is. The game board 1 has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game balls can roll down. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting opening 33, a passage gate 35, The first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first big winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second big winning opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B located below the special winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, an outlet 41, an upper movable effect member. 101A, a lower movable effect member 101B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the passage gate 35, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40A. , 40B, 40C, 40D form a winning area. Note that FIG. 4 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

On the surface of the game board 1, a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33, a second starting opening 33, a passage gate 35, general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, an out opening 41. Is provided. In addition to the out port 41 provided below the game board 1, an out port is provided in the game area 1p near the first big winning opening shutter 36A, the second big winning opening shutter 37A or the first starting opening 32. May be.

The lower movable effect member 101B is provided at the rear of the game board 1 and can be viewed by the player from the front. An opening 1B (see FIG. 22) is formed in the game board 1. The upper movable effect member 101A is arranged between the game board 1 and the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) in the upper part of the game board 1, and the front of the upper movable effect member 101A is covered with a decorative member 99. There is.

That is, the upper movable effect member 101A is arranged behind the decorative member 99. The decoration member 99 is composed of a member that can transmit light, and characters such as alphabets, numbers, kanji, hiragana, katakana, and symbols may be formed on the decoration member 99. It may be formed. The decorative member 99 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative member of the present invention.

An opening (not shown) is formed in the lower right of the game board 1, and the first special winning opening shutter 36A, the second special winning opening 37, the second special winning opening shutter 37A, and the specific area 38A are formed in the opening. A winning opening unit in which the non-specific area 38B and the displacement member 39 are unitized is attached.

The guide rail 30 includes an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game balls to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail 30A, and is arranged inside the outer rail 30A on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball fired by the launching device 26 is directed toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven in the game area 1p of the game board 1 or the stage 31. Run down. In this process, the game ball wins any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, and the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. When the player does not win the prize or when the player has passed the passage gate 35 and has not won the prize thereafter, the coin is discharged from the outlet 41 to be collected.

In addition, the winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, thereby giving a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of a second starting opening 33 described later, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.). Means to do. At this time, passing the winning area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the winning area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the outlet 41, but in any case, it will be described later. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both the passing of the game ball and the winning ball to the winning area lead to winning. Therefore, in the following description, the term "winning" is used unless otherwise specified. Further, passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so the game ball mainly flows down on the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, so the game ball mainly flows down on the right side of the stage 31. In general, the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right hitting".

The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that a game ball wins, and an opportunity for displaying the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. To give. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 realize a first starting area and a second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball is won in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided immediately below the passage gate 35. When a game ball is won in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. Winning difficulty of the second starting opening 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 is opened/closed so as to have a projecting/retracting attitude in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the second start opening 33 and a second start. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to the mouth 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 to open and close in the front-rear direction, and for example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting opening is widened by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. Alternatively, it may be a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting opening by horizontally moving in the front-back direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second starting opening 33. The winning of the game ball to the passage gate 35 is detected by the passage gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passage gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in the hitting game state (big hitting game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. The first special winning opening 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the passage gate 35. The second special winning opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the first special winning opening 36. The positions at which the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, but can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

The first big winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large lateral dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A first special winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first special winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first winning opening 36. The winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36 is detected by the first special winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second big winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can be won one by one. A second special winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second special winning opening 37 is provided in the vicinity of the second special winning opening 37. The winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37 is detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first special winning opening shutter 36A switches the first special winning opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by performing an opening/closing operation so as to have a forward tilted posture/retracted posture in the front-back direction of the game board 1. It is arranged so as to cover the first special winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 36A changes to an open state in which the game balls can be won in the first special winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by the special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second special winning opening shutter 37A switches the second special winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-back direction of the game board 1. In the closed state, the second special winning opening 37 is opened. It is arranged to cover. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 37A changes to an open state in which the game balls can be won in the second special winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or is difficult to close. It is driven by the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are areas through which the game balls won in the second special winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered by the cover member 43. The ball passage of the game ball from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second big winning opening 37 passes through one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, and then is guided to the back surface of the game board 1 and collected. A second special winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at an intermediate position of the ball passage from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A is provided near the specific area 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is changed to an open state (first state) where the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is easy and a closed state (second state) where the V prize is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which the V winning has become impossible passes through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 36, the first big winning opening shutter 36A, the first big winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first big winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning device. Has been realized. The second special winning opening 37, the second special winning opening shutter 37A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second special winning opening count switch 370 realize a second variable winning device.

The general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C are provided on the left side of the first special winning opening 36, and the general winning openings 40D are provided on the upper right side of the second special winning opening 37. When the game balls are won in the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B.

<Structure and operation of lower movable effect member 101B>
7 to 19 are diagrams showing the game board 1 showing a state in which the lower movable effect member 101B and the lower movable effect member 101B are moved. In FIGS. 7 to 19, the up, down, left, and right directions are from the player. It is the vertical and horizontal directions of the lower movable effect member 101B as seen. The lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

7, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9, the lower movable effect member 101B includes fixed bodies 104, 105, movable bodies 106, 107, 108, and a movable member 109.

The fixed body 104 is fixed to the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) behind the game board 1. In FIG. 8, the fixed body 104 is provided with shafts 104A to 104D, and gears 113A to 113D are rotatably supported by the shafts 104A to 104D, respectively.

8 and 9, the motor mounting plate 110 is mounted on the front surface of the fixed body 104, and the gears 113A to 113D are housed between the motor mounting plate 110 and the fixed body 104.

A motor 110A is fixed to the motor mounting plate 110. A gear 113A is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 110A. The gear 113D is formed to have a larger diameter than the gears 113A to 113C, and the rotation of the motor 110A is reduced by being transmitted from the gear 113A to the large gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C.

The fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104, and the movable bodies 106 and 107 are housed between the fixed bodies 104 and 105 and provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105. Has been.

Rack teeth 106A extending in the vertical direction are formed on the side surface of the movable body 106, and the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D. As a result, when the motor 110A is driven, the movable body 106 moves vertically with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 by the gear 113D.

The movable body 106 is formed with a pair of vertically extending guide holes 106B and 106C, and the guide protrusions 104E and 104F provided on the fixed body 104 are slidably fitted in the guide holes 106B and 106C, respectively. I am fit.

A long guide hole 104G extending in the vertical direction is formed in the fixed body 104, and a guide protrusion 106E provided on the back surface of the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 104G. ..

As a result, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed body 104, the movable body 106 moves along the guide protrusions 104E and 104F and the guide hole 104G and does not swing in the left-right direction with respect to the fixed body 104. ..

A guide hole 107A extending in the vertical direction is formed in the movable body 107, and a guide protrusion 106F provided on the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 107A. As a result, the movable body 107 is supported by the guide protrusion 106F and moves in the vertical direction with respect to the movable body 106, and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the movable body 106.

On the side surface of the movable body 107, rack teeth 107B having an uneven portion extending in the vertical direction are formed, and the rack teeth 107B mesh with the gear 111.

The fixed body 105 is formed with rack teeth 105A facing the left-right direction of the game board 1 and having an uneven portion extending in the up-down direction, and the rack teeth 105A mesh with the gear 111. The gear 111 is rotatably attached to a shaft portion 106G provided on the movable body 106. As a result, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction, the gear 111 that moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106 rotates, so that the movable body 107 moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106.

The movable body 106 is provided with a shaft portion 106H, and an arm member 112 is swingably attached to the shaft portion 106H. A pressing portion 107C extending in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 107 is provided above the movable body 107, and the pressing portion 107C is located above the arm member 112. positioned.

When the movable body 107 moves downward, the arm member 112 swings downward by the pressing portion 107C with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

A pair of vertically extending guide holes 108A, 108B are formed at both ends of the movable body 108, and guide projections 105B, 105C provided at both ends of the fixed body 105 slide in the guide holes 108A, 108B. It fits freely. As a result, the movable body 108 is supported by the guide protrusions 105B and 105C and moves in the vertical direction relative to the fixed body 105, and does not swing in the lateral direction with respect to the fixed body 105.

A guide groove 108C extending vertically is formed on the back surface of the movable body 108. A guide protrusion 107D is formed on the upper end of the movable body 107, and the guide protrusion 107D is slidably fitted in the guide groove 108C.

As a result, when the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C and contacts the upper end of the inner circumference of the guide groove 108C, whereby the movable body 108 moves upward. To do.

A curved hole 108D is formed in the movable body 108. The curved hole 108D extends in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 with a predetermined length. The movable member 109 is attached to the movable body 108 and is movable in the vertical direction together with the movable body 108.

10 and 11, the movable member 109 includes a rotating body 114, a plurality of slider members 115, a circular member 116, and a plurality of outer ring members 117.

The rotating body 114 is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 116i provided on the circular member 116, and the shaft portion 116i is fixed to the movable body 108. A fitting protrusion 114A is provided on the back surface of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 114A is slidably fitted in the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 and the guide hole 112A (see FIG. 8) of the arm member 112.

When the arm member 112 swings around the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum, the rotating body 114 moves relative to the movable body 108 around the shaft portion 116i as a fulcrum when the fitting protrusion 114A slides along the curved hole 108D. It can be rotated.

The rotating body 114 has a plurality of slits 114B formed therein. In FIG. 15, the slit 114B has a first linear portion 114n that extends linearly inward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 and a linear shape that bends from the first linear portion 114n outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114. And a second straight portion 114w extending in the direction of the arrow, and is formed in a dogleg shape.

10 and 11, a fitting protrusion 115A is formed on the back surface of the slider member 115. The fitting protrusion 115A is slidably fitted in the slit 114B of the rotating body 114.

The circular member 116 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 116A that protrude toward the movable body 108. The protrusion 116A is engaged with an engaging hole 108F formed in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 so as to be separated from each other by a screw or the like (not shown). As a result, the circular member 116 is fixed to the movable body 108 and does not rotate relative to the movable body 108. Engagement in the present embodiment may include engagement or fixation of an object with screws, screws, or the like (constituent members, fixing portions, engaging portions, etc.). It can also be expressed as being present. Further, the slit of the present embodiment includes notches, grooves, elongated holes, and the like.

A plurality of fitting grooves 116B are formed in the circular member 116. In FIG. 15, the fitting groove 116B is bent from the first straight line portion 116n extending linearly inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116 and the first straight line portion 116n outward in the radial direction of the circular member 116. And a second straight portion 116w extending linearly.

10 and 11, a plurality of fitting protrusions 115B are formed on the surface of the slider member 115, and the fitting protrusions 115B are slidably fitted in the fitting grooves 116B.

The outer ring member 117 is divided and provided in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116. The outer ring members 117 are attached to the radial outer peripheral portion of the slider member 115, respectively, and are provided around the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 so as to contact the radial outer peripheral surface of the circular member 116.

In the slider member 115, the fitting protrusion 115A is fitted in the slit 114B of the rotating body 114, and the fitting protrusion 115B is fitted in the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. Accordingly, when the rotating body 114 rotates in one direction, the slider member 115 moves outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 along the slit 114B and the fitting groove 116B, and then swings in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. Move. Therefore, the outer ring member 117 moves outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114, and then moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 so as to form a gap in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114.

A torsion spring 118 is wound around the shaft portion 116i of the circular member 116. The torsion spring 118 has one end attached to the movable body 108 and the other end attached to the rotating body 114, and urges the rotating body 114 to the standby position.

In FIGS. 8 and 9, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are connected by a coil spring 119. Specifically, in FIG. 9, an engaging portion 105D is provided on the back surface of the fixed body 105, and one end of a coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 105D. An engaging portion 106I is provided on the lower portion of the side surface of the movable body 106, and the other end of the coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 106I.

The coil spring 119 is arranged so that the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are relatively contracted, that is, the vertical distance between the engagement portion 105D and the engagement portion 106I is shortened. Is urged. In other words, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are biased by the coil spring 119 so that the vertical distance between the engagement portion 105D and the engagement portion 106I becomes shorter.

The movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120. Specifically, an engaging portion 106J is provided below the movable body 106, and one end of the coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 106J. An engaging portion 104H is provided above the fixed body 104, and the other end of the coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 104H.

The coil spring 120 includes the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 so that the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 relatively contract, that is, the vertical distance between the engagement portion 104H and the engagement portion 106J is shortened. Is urged. In other words, the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are biased by the coil spring 120 so that the vertical distance between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J becomes shorter. Relative extension means that when one component and the other component move relatively, a specific portion of one component and a specific portion of the other component (for example, the lower end of one component and the other component). It means that the distance to the lower end) becomes longer, and the relative contraction means that when one part and the other part move relatively, a specific part of one part and a specific part of the other part ( For example, it means that the distance between the lower end of one component and the lower end of the other component becomes shorter. 8 and 9 show a state where the coil springs 119 and 120 are maximally contracted.

In FIG. 8, the lower movable effect member 101B includes a flexible cable 130. The other end of the flexible cable 130 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6).

The flexible cable 130 extends from the other end to the movable member 109 through a slit 108E (see FIG. 9) formed in the movable body 108. The movable member 109 has a built-in illumination substrate (not shown) having LEDs (not shown), and the flexible cable 130 turns on the LED by transmitting a control signal from the lamp control circuit 78 to the illumination substrate.

The flexible cable 130 is installed by being bent between the fixed body 104, the movable body 106, the fixed body 105, and the movable body 108, and when the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 move relative to the fixed body 105. It is designed to expand and contract. This allows the flexible cable 130 to smoothly expand and contract while allowing the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 to move with respect to the fixed body 105.

Here, the motor 110A of the present embodiment constitutes the driving member of the present invention, and the movable body 106 constitutes the first movable body of the present invention. The movable body 107 constitutes the second movable body of the present invention, and the movable body 108 constitutes the third movable body of the present invention. The rotating body 114 constitutes the rotating member of the present invention. The fitting protrusion 114A constitutes the first fitting portion of the present invention, and the slit 114B constitutes the slit of the present invention. The fitting protrusion 115A constitutes the second fitting portion of the present invention. The movable member 109 constitutes the movable member of the present invention, and the slider member 115 and the outer ring member 117 constitute the movable portion of the present invention. The arm member 112 constitutes the interlocking portion of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the lower movable effect member 101B will be described.
The lower movable effect member 101B is installed behind the game board 1. The standby position is a state in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 have not moved upward (in front of the central portion of the display area 4A) with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105. That is, the position shown in FIG. 3 is the standby position of the lower movable effect member 101B. Further, at the position shown in FIG. 3, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 (see FIG. 13), and the lower movable effect member 101B expands in the radial direction (FIG. 18). The state shown in 1) is also included in the standby position.

When the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the movable bodies 106 to 108 are in a relatively contracted state as shown in FIG. 12, and the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 has the curved hole 108D. It is fitted to the upper end of the inner circumference in the extending direction. Further, the gear 113D meshes with the rack teeth 106A of the movable body 106 below the upper portion thereof.

When the lower movable effect member 101B is located at the standby position and the motor 110A is driven in one direction (forward rotation) from the initial position, the rotation of the gear 113A causes the gears 113B and 113C to rotate, as shown in FIG. The movable body 106 is moved downward by the rotation of the gear 113D that is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gear 113D and meshes with the rack teeth 106A.

When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 provided integrally with the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating. The fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104 fixed to the rear cover 1A and does not move together with the fixed body 104. Therefore, when the gear 111 rotates, the rotation of the gear 111 is transmitted to the rack teeth 107B and the movable body 107 moves downward. Move to. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward with respect to the game board 1, which is one direction.

When the movable body 107 moves downward, the pressing portion 107C presses the arm member 112 downward, so that the arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 that fits into the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves downward along the curved hole 108D.

As a result, the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise rotation direction (clockwise rotation when viewed from the game board 1 side) in FIG.

In the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is located at the standby position, the rotating body 114 is biased to the standby position by the torsion spring 118. When the rotating body 114 is biased to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 has a radial inner circumferential end of the first linear portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. Of the two fitting protrusions 115B, the fitting protrusion 115B located inward in the radial direction is engaged with the radially inner end of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. I am fit.

When the rotator 114 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A moves radially outward from the radially inner peripheral end of the first linear portion 114n, and is fitted as shown in FIG. The compound protrusion 115B moves radially outward from the radially inner end of the first straight portion 116n.

As a result, the slider member 115 moves from the radially inner side of the circular member 116 to the radially outer side, the outer ring member 117 moves from the radially inner side of the circular member 116 to the radially outer side, and at the standby position. Expand in the radial direction (see FIG. 18).

When the motor 110A is reversely driven to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 moves upward along the rack teeth 106A (see FIG. 12). ..

When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 provided integrally with the movable body 106 moves upward while rotating. Accordingly, the gear 111 moves upward while rotating along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105, so that the movable body 107 in which the rack teeth 107B mesh with the gear 111 moves upward as the gear 111 rotates. (See Figure 14).

When the movable body 107 moves upward, the pressing portion 107C does not press the arm member 112 downward. At this time, the rotating body 114 is rotated in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) in FIG. 16 with respect to the movable body 108 by the urging force of the torsion spring 118, and the arm member 112 is moved. It swings upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

At this time, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 that fits into the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves upward along the curved hole 108D. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 15, the fitting protrusion 115A moves from the outer side in the radial direction of the first straight portion 114n to the inner circumferential end in the radial direction, and the fitting protrusion 115B moves in the first straight portion. 116n moves from the outer side in the radial direction to the inner circumferential end in the radial direction. Therefore, the slider member 115 moves inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 moves so as to contract inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116.

In this way, the motor 110A is driven to rotate normally from the initial position to move the movable body 107 downward, and thereafter, the movable body 107 is reversely driven so as to return to the initial position from the driven position. With 101B in the standby position, the outer ring member 117 can be moved between a position radially inward of the rotating body 114 (see FIG. 3) and a position radially outward (see FIG. 18). I do. As a result, the lower movable effect member 101B can be expanded and contracted at the standby position.

On the other hand, when performing the effect that the lower movable effect member 101B moves upward from the standby position, the motor 110A is reversed from the initial position in a state where the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively contracted as shown in FIG. Drive to rotate.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 14, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves upward.

When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 provided integrally with the movable body 106 rotates and moves upward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105. Along with this, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107</b>B meshing with the gear 111 moves upward by a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move upward with respect to the game board 1.

The motor 110A drives in the normal rotation (one direction) and in the reverse rotation (the other direction), and the lower movable effect member 101B and the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward (one direction) and upward (the other direction). It is possible to express it as moving, and such an expression is used to express the direction of rotation such as forward rotation and reverse rotation, and the moving direction such as downward, upward, left and right directions. It is possible to use the expression in the other direction with respect to.

When the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108 and contacts the upper end of the inner circumference of the guide groove 108C. As a result, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves upward.

When the movable body 108 moves upward, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 moves downward along the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108, and the arm member 112 swings upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. As a result, the rotating body 114 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) in FIG.

In the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is at the standby position, the rotating body 114 is biased to the standby position by being biased by the torsion spring 118. When the rotating body 114 is biased to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 has a radial inner circumferential end of the first linear portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. Of the plurality of fitting protrusions 115B, the fitting protrusion 115B located inward in the radial direction is engaged with the radially inner end of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. I am fit.

When the rotating body 114 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 15 by the arm member 112, the fitting protrusion 115A moves radially outward from the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n, and is fitted. The protrusion 115B moves radially outward from the radially inner end of the first straight portion 116n.

As a result, the slider member 115 moves from the radially inner side of the rotating body 114 to the radially outer side, and the outer ring member 117 moves from the radially inner side of the rotating body 114 to the radially outer side.

When the rotating body 114 further rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 16 as the movable body 107 further rises, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 17, the fitting protrusion 115A moves from the first straight portion 114n. After moving to the second straight portion 114w, it moves outward in the radial direction of the second straight portion 114w. At the same time, the fitting protrusion 115B moves from the first straight portion 116n to the second straight portion 116w, and then moves outward in the radial direction of the second straight portion 116w.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the slider member 115 swings in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 while being moved outward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 causes the rotor 114 to radiate. It moves in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114 from the state of moving outward in the direction. That is, the movable bodies 106 to 108 move the outer ring member 117 outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 until the movable bodies 106 to 108 move relatively to the standby position, and then move in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. Produce to move. The state in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively extended most (the state shown in FIG. 14) corresponds to the movable position of the present invention.

When the motor 110A is reversely driven to return to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves downward. To do.

When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 integrally provided on the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating, so that the gear 111 rotates downward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105. Move to. Along with this, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 12, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107B meshing with the gear 111 moves downward.

The fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 of the present embodiment are connected by a coil spring 119, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 119 in a relatively contracting direction. Further, the movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 120 in a relatively contracting direction.

Therefore, the movable body 106 moves downward at a faster speed than when it moves upward from the standby position due to the biasing force of the coil springs 119 and 120 in addition to the rotation of the motor 110A.

When the movable body 106 moves downward, the movable body 107 moves downward together with the movable body 106 by a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. When the movable body 107 moves downward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves downward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108 and contacts the lower end of the guide groove 108C in the radial inner circumference. As a result, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves downward.

When the movable body 108 moves downward, the curved hole 108D moves downward along the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114, and when the fitting protrusion 114A abuts on the radially inner upper end of the curved hole 108D, The arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. As a result, the rotating body 114 rotates in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the game board 1 side), as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16.

When the rotating body 114 rotates in the clockwise direction as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16, the rotating body 114 is biased by the torsion spring 118, and the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 is aligned with the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. The second protrusion 114B moves from the second straight portion 114w to the first straight portion 114n, and the fitting protrusion 115B moves from the second straight portion 116w of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116 to the first straight portion 116n. As a result, the slider member 115 moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116.

When the rotating body 114 further rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 16 from this state, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 moves to the radial inner circumferential end of the first linear portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 115B moves to the lower end of the radially inner circumference of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. As a result, the outer ring member 117 is movable radially outward from the radial direction of the circular member 116.

By driving the motor 110A in the other direction (reverse rotation) from the initial position in this way, the lower movable effect member 101B is moved upward, and the outer ring member 117 is moved radially outward and circumferentially of the rotating body 114. The effect that the lower movable effect member 101B is enlarged when the lower movable effect member 101B moves to the movable position can be performed (see FIG. 19).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B includes the movable body 106 movable upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 by the rotation of the motor 110A, and the pressing portion 107C. A movable body 107 that has the movable body 106 and is movable in the movable body 106 and that can move upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 together with the movable body 106, and above and below the game board 1 together with the movable body 107. The movable body 108 is provided.

Further, the lower movable effect member 101B has a guide hole 112A, is swingably provided on the movable body 106, and can be pressed by the pressing portion 107C, and a fitting protrusion 114A fitted to the arm member 112. And a rotating body 114 having a plurality of slits 114B and rotatably provided on the movable body 108, and a fitting protrusion 115A that fits into the slit 114B. It is provided with a slider member 115 that is movable in the circumferential direction and a movable member 109 having an outer ring member 117.

Further, the lower movable effect member 101B moves the movable bodies 106 and 107 downward by rotating the motor 110A from the initial position in the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is positioned at the standby position to rotate the arm member 112. By converting the rotation of the rotating body 114 in one direction, the outer ring member 117 is moved in the radial direction while allowing only the rotation of the rotating body 114, and the motor 110A is reversely rotated from the initial position to move the movable body 106 upward. The movable member 108 is moved upward to move the movable member 108 upward to move the lower movable effect member 101B to the movable position while rotating the outer ring member 117 while converting the swing of the arm member 112 into rotation of the rotating member 114 in one direction. The body 114 is movable in the radial direction and the circumferential direction.

Thus, two different effects such as an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position and an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B while moving from the standby position to the movable position can be easily performed by switching the rotation direction of the single motor 110A. Therefore, the performance of the lower movable effect member 101B can be further enhanced.

<Composition of winning holes>
The configuration of the winning opening will be described with reference to FIGS. The game board 1 includes a winning opening unit 201 shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, and the winning opening unit 201 has a first starting opening member 202. The first starting port member 202 is attached to the game board 1 (see FIG. 3), and an opening forming the first starting port 32 is formed at the upper end of the first starting port member 202.

Inside the first starting opening member 202, a ball passage 203 for discharging the game balls won in the first starting opening 32 to the downstream is formed. A cylindrical portion 202A (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is formed in the lower portion of the first starting opening member 202, and the cylindrical portion 202A extends rearward from the first starting opening member 202.

20 and 21, a spherical passage 204 is formed inside the cylindrical portion 202A, and the spherical passage 204 communicates with the spherical passage 203.

21 and 22, a ball passage unit 205 is provided behind the first starting port member 202. In FIG. 21, a ball passage 206 communicating with the ball passage 204 is formed in the ball passage unit 205, and the ball passage 206 faces the ball passage 204 in the front-rear direction.

A discharge port 206A opening downward is formed on the bottom surface of the ball passage 206, and the discharge port 206A communicates with the ball passage 206. As a result, the game ball that has won the first starting port 32 passes through the ball passage 204 from the ball passage 203, is discharged to the ball passage 206, and drops downward through the discharge port 206A.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the state in which the outer ring member 117 is in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 and is radially expanded (the lower movable effect member). 101B is in a movable state), so that the ball passages 203, 204, 206 (the ball passage 206 is not shown) pass below the lower movable effect member 101B from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B. It is provided.

As a result, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 of the present embodiment are provided with the game balls that have won the first start opening 32 from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the outer rings installed below the lower movable effect member 101B. It is discharged to the back surface (or the back side, the bottom, etc.) of the game board 1 through the bottom of the member 117.

20 to 22, the winning opening unit 201 includes a general winning opening member 207. The general winning opening member 207 is attached to the game board 1, and an opening forming the general winning opening 40A to 40C is formed at the upper end of the general winning opening member 207.

Ball passages 208 to 210 are provided inside the general winning opening member 207. The ball passage 208 communicates with the general winning opening 40A, extends from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40A to the right, and discharges the game balls winning the general winning opening 40A downstream.

The ball passage 209 communicates with the general winning opening 40B and the ball passage 208 downstream of the general winning opening 40B and the ball passage 208. The ball passage 209 extends from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40B to the right, and discharges the game balls winning the general winning opening 40B and the game balls passing through the ball passage 208 to the downstream.

The ball passage 210 communicates with the general winning opening 40C and the ball passage 209 at the downstream of the general winning opening 40C and the ball passage 209. The ball passage 210 extends downward from the general winning opening 40C, and discharges the game balls winning the general winning opening 40C and the game balls passing through the ball passage 209 to the downstream.

The ball passage 209 merges with the ball passage 208 at the general winning opening 40B, and the passage area, which is the area of the vertical cross section orthogonal to the direction (left-right direction) through which the game balls pass, is the passage area of the ball passage 208. Is formed larger than. That is, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208. For example, when the vertical width of the ball passage 208 is large enough to pass one game ball, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is large enough to pass at least two game balls. Is desirable.

In the present embodiment, it is described that the vertical passage area of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the passage area of the ball passage 208, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the passage area in the front-rear direction is large. It may be formed. Further, even when the passage area is formed to be large both in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, the effect of facilitating the discharge is desired.

20 and 21, a discharge port 211 is formed below the ball passage 210. As a result, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 40A are discharged to the discharging opening 211 through the ball passages 208 to 210. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 40B is discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passages 209 and 210, and the game ball that has won the general winning hole 40C is discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passage 210.

A ball passage 212 communicating with the discharge port 211 is formed in the ball passage unit 205, and the ball passage 212 extends rearward from the discharge port 211 and then extends rightward. A discharge port 212A is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage 212, and the game ball introduced into the ball passage 212 from the discharge port 211 is discharged downward from the discharge port 212A. The ball passages 208 to 210, 212 of the present embodiment discharge the game balls won in the general winning openings 40A to 40C to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B.

In FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 are in communication with the merging portion 213 through the discharge port 206A and the discharge port 212A, and the game ball that has won the first starting port 32 and the general winning port 40A. The game balls that have won the prize of 40C are merged at the merge section 213 (merge area) and are discharged to the back surface of the game board 1.

20 and 21, a general winning opening left switch 400A is provided in the ball passage 212, and the general winning opening left switch 400A has a detection surface 400a in the vertical direction. Thereby, the general winning opening left switch 400A detects the game ball flowing rightward (first direction) in the horizontal direction in the ball passage 212.

The ball passage 206 is provided with a first starting opening switch 320, and the first starting opening switch 320 has a detection surface 320a in a left-right direction different from the detection surface 400a of the general winning opening left switch 400A. As a result, the first starting opening switch 320 detects the game ball flowing in the ball passage 206 in the vertical direction (the second direction different from the first direction).

In FIG. 21, the first starting opening switch 320 is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A. 20 and 21, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided in the ball passage unit 205 below the lower movable effect member 101B, and the magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212. , Located below the first starting port 32.

The magnetic sensor 214 is connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6), detects that the player has intentionally brought a magnet or the like close to the first starting opening 32, and sends a magnetic signal to the main control circuit 60. Output. The main control circuit 60 transmits an abnormal signal to the hall computer 100 when a magnetic signal is input. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from illegally performing an illegal act such as illegally acquiring a game ball with respect to the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment.

Here, the 1st starting opening switch 320 comprises the 1st sensor and game medium detection member of this invention. The general winning opening left switch 400A constitutes the second sensor of the present invention, and the magnetic sensor 214 constitutes the magnetic detection sensor of the present invention.

In FIG. 20, the first starting port member 202 is provided with an electric circuit board 215, and the electric circuit board 215 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 215a. The light emission control of the LED 215 a is performed by the illumination board 215. Here, the first starting opening 32 of the present embodiment constitutes the winning opening of the present invention, and the ball passages 203 and 204 constitute the upstream game medium passage of the present invention. The illuminated substrate 215 constitutes the illuminated substrate of the present invention.

In addition, the first starting opening member 202 of the present embodiment is capable of emitting light with the first starting opening 32 in which the game balls can be won, the ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the game balls winning in the first starting opening 32 to the downstream. A winning opening unit of the present invention having a different illuminated substrate 215 is configured.

Further, the ball passage 206 of the present embodiment constitutes the downstream side game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage unit 205 lowers the game balls discharged to the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first starting opening member 202. It constitutes a game medium passage portion of the present invention in which a ball passage 206 for discharging to the back surface of the game board 1 is formed through the lower side movable effect member 101B.

In FIG. 22, one end of a cable 216 is connected to the decorative board 215. The other end of the cable 216 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6). The lighting board 215 controls the lighting of the LED 215a based on the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78. The cable 216 of the present embodiment constitutes the wiring of the present invention. Here, the LED 215a is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

Note that the LED 215a may be capable of emitting light when the passage of a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, or capable of emitting light according to an effect. At this time, the LED 215a may emit light from one LED 215a and then emit the other LED 215a, or may emit any LED 215a.

Although the other end of the cable 216 is described as being connected to the lamp control circuit 78 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a relay board that relays the lamp control circuit 78 and the decorative board 215 is provided. May be connected to. In this case, the relay board may be provided with an LED driver for controlling the LED 215a. In this case, it is possible to recognize the relay board as an LED drive circuit.

22 and 23, a U-shaped protrusion 217 is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205, and the protrusion 217 is located above the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 21). It projects upward from the upper surface of the unit 205.

In FIG. 22, the cable 216 extends downward from the decorative board 215 and extends rearward of the ball passage unit 205 along the ball passage unit 205. The cable 216 extending to the rear of the ball passage unit 205 is fastened to the protrusion 217 by a binding member such as a band (not shown), and is wired below the game board 1 from the protrusion 217 through the slit 218 of the rear cover 1A.

Cables (not shown) are connected to the first starting opening switch 320, the general winning opening left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214, and these cables are also bundled and fastened to the protrusion 217 by a band or the like.

22 and 23, a semi-cylindrical member 219 is provided on the upper part of the ball passage unit 205, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 covers the upper part of the protrusion 217 and the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage. It is provided between the unit 205 and the unit 205 (see FIG. 23). The protrusion 217 of the present embodiment constitutes a supporting portion for supporting the wiring of the present invention, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 constitutes the covering member of the present invention.
Here, to support (guide or guide) the wiring includes a case where the wiring is fixed to the protrusion 217 with a band or the like, and may include inserting the wiring into the opening formed by the protrusion 217.

Moreover, the 1st starting opening 32 of this embodiment comprises the 1st winning opening of this invention, and the general winning openings 40A-40C comprise the 2nd winning opening of this invention. The ball passages 204 and 206 form the first passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 212 forms the second passage of the present invention.

The ball passages 203, 204 and 206 form the game medium passage of the present invention. The ball passage 208 constitutes the first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passages 209, 210 constitute the second game medium passage of the present invention. The general winning opening 40A constitutes the first game medium winning opening of the present invention, and the general winning openings 40B and 40C form the second game medium winning opening of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the game board 1 having the game area 1p in which the game balls roll, and the game board 1 are provided and are movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. Side movable effect member 101B, a first start opening 32 provided on the game board 1 so as to be positioned in front of the lower movable effect member 101B, and in which a game ball can win, and a game ball that has passed through the first start opening 32 Is provided with the ball passages 203, 204, 206 for discharging from the front side of the lower movable effect member 101B to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B, and the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position. It is possible to execute a movable effect that moves in the direction of the ball passages 203, 204, 206 below the lower movable effect member 101B, and in the state where the lower movable effect member 101B is moved at the standby position, the ball passages 203, 204. , 206 are provided so as to pass below the lower movable effect member 101B from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B.

This makes it possible to secure a space in which the lower movable effect member 101B can move at the standby position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance of the lower movable effect member 101B while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, it is possible to increase the size of the lower movable effect member 101B and expand the movable range of the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position. The performance of the lower movable effect member 101B can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, by installing the first starting opening 32 in front of the lower movable effect member 101B, the lower side existing behind the first starting opening 32 for the player who visually recognizes the first starting opening 32 during the game. The movable effect member 101B can be visually recognized. Therefore, the effect produced by the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively improved for the player.
In particular, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B executes a movable effect that moves in the radial direction so as to expand in the radial direction, so that the movable range of the lower movable effect member 101B is expanded. Therefore, the effect produced by the lower movable effect member 101B can be improved more effectively.
Further, the ball passages 203, 204, 206 are provided so as to pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is moved at the standby position. Since a large space in which the movable accessory can move can be secured at the standby position, the lower movable effect member 101B can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the lower movable effect member 101B can be dynamically moved, and the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the general winning openings 40A to 40C in which the gaming balls can be won, and the gaming balls that have passed through the first starting opening 32 are passed under the lower movable effect member 101B to the gaming board 1. Ball passages 204 and 206 discharged to the back surface of the game ball, a ball passage 212 that discharges the game balls winning the general winning openings 40A to 40C to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower movable effect member 101B, and a ball passage 206. Is provided in the ball passage 206, has a detection surface 320a for detecting the game ball discharged to the ball passage 206, and is provided in the ball passage 212, and a first starting opening switch 320 for detecting the game ball rolling in the first direction. , A general winning opening left switch 400A having a detection surface 400a in a direction different from the detection surface 320a and detecting a game ball rolling in a second direction different from the first direction, and the first starting opening switch 320 Is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A.

Further, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided below the lower movable effect member 101B so as to be located between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212. Further, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 are joined by a joining portion 213 (a joining area) at the downstream side in the discharging direction of the game balls.

As a result, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 can be installed in different horizontal and vertical directions, and the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 can be joined by the joining portion 213.

In addition to this, the first starting opening switch 320 is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214 is provided below the lower movable effect member 101B between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212. Therefore, the three sensors including the first starting opening switch 320, the general winning opening left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214 can be installed in a small space below the lower movable effect member 101B.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance of the lower movable effect member 101B while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a general winning opening 40A provided on the game board 1 for winning a game ball, and a general winning opening 40B provided on the game board 1 for winning a game ball, 40C, a ball passage 208 that is provided in the game board 1 and discharges a game ball that has won the general winning opening 40A to the downstream, and a game ball that is provided in the game board 1 and that has won the general winning openings 40B and 40C is in the downstream. The ball passages 209 and 210 for discharging are provided, and the ball passage 209 merges with the ball passage 208 at the downstream of the general winning opening 40B, and is the area of the vertical cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls pass. The area is formed larger than the passage area of the spherical passage 208.

As a result, even if the number of game media passing through the ball passages 208 to 210 per unit time is increased in order to reduce the game speed, the game balls won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B are ball passages. It is possible to prevent clogging in the downstream of 209. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged to the discharge port 211 on the downstream side, and the playability can be improved.

In particular, since the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed to be larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208, it is possible to prevent the area occupied by the ball passage 209 from increasing in the front-back direction of the game board 1. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B from being blocked in the downstream of the ball passage 209.

In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed to be larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208. The width may be formed larger than the width of the ball passage 208 in the front-rear direction. By doing this, while preventing the area occupied by the ball passage 209 in the up-down direction of the game board 1 from increasing, it is possible that the game balls won from the general winning openings 40A and 40B are blocked downstream of the ball passage 209. It can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a first starting opening 32 in which gaming balls can be won, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the gaming balls winning in the first starting opening 32 to the downstream, and a light-emitting substrate that can emit light. A ball passage that discharges the game balls discharged to the first starting opening member 202 having 215 and the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first starting opening member 202 to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower movable effect member 101B. A ball passage unit 205 in which 206 is formed, a first starting opening switch 320 provided in the ball passage 206 for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage 206, and a cable 216 connected to the decorative board 215 are provided. ing.

In addition to this, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205 so as to be located above the ball passage unit 205, and a projection 217 that supports a cable 216 extending from the decorative board 215. The semi-cylindrical member 219 is provided between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage unit 205 so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217.

As a result, the ball passages 203, 204, 206 can be passed from the front side of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B, and a space in which the lower movable effect member 101B can move is secured. You can As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance of the lower movable effect member 101B while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B.

In addition, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, the size of the lower movable effect member 101B can be increased, and the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be enhanced more effectively. ..

Further, the cable 216 extending from the decorative board 215 can be supported by the protrusion 217, and the cable 216 extending from the decorative board 215 can be prevented from fluttering below the lower movable effect member 101B. As a result, the cable 216 can be prevented from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B is moved, the outer ring member 117 can be smoothly moved, and the cable 216 is moved to the outer ring member 117. Can be protected from

Further, the cable 216 extending from the decorative board 215 is inserted into a projection 217A (see FIG. 22) provided in the vicinity of the decorative board 215 before the projection 217, and is bent downward with respect to the projection 217A. .. As a result, the cable 216 is guided by the protrusion 217A, so that the connecting portion between the decorative substrate 215 and the cable 216 is not burdened. Thus, the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217A.

Note that supporting (guiding or guiding) the wiring (the cable 216) by the protrusion 217A includes the case where the wiring is fixed to the protrusion 217A with a band or the like, and the wiring is inserted into the opening formed by the protrusion 217A. Can include doing.

Further, by providing the semi-cylindrical member 219 between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball passage unit 205 so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217, the cable 216 and the lower movable effect member 101B are separated from each other by a semi-cylindrical member. It can be shielded by 219, and it is possible to more effectively prevent the cable 216 from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 moves. In addition, by colliding the game ball with the semi-cylindrical member 219 when the game ball flows down from the lower movable effect member 101B side, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the cable 216, and the cable 216 from the game ball. Can be protected.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the protrusion 217 is formed in a U shape protruding from the upper portion of the ball passage unit 205, and the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217. For example, the cable 216 can be firmly fastened to the projection 217, and the cable 216 can be more effectively prevented from fluttering below the lower movable effect member 101B.

Further, the protrusion 217 may be formed in a substantially U-shape, and the cable 216 may be housed in the space inside the U-shape of the protrusion 217. In this case, the protrusion 217 may be formed of a hard body or a soft body, and one end of the U-shaped side (the U-shaped left portion or the right portion) has a ball for inserting the cable 216 from the side. It is also possible to provide a space with the passage unit 205. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to more effectively prevent the cable 216 from fluttering.

In addition, in the lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment, the outer ring member 117 is arranged without any gap in the circumferential direction at the standby position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 25, the outer ring member 117 has a circular shape. In a state where the outer ring member 117 is in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the ring-shaped member 116 (see FIG. 15), the outer ring member 117 is located at a first position that is separated by a gap 121 in the circumferential direction, and in the standby state, The outer ring member 117 may be movable between the first position (position shown in FIG. 25) and the second position (position shown in FIG. 26) radially outward of the rotating body 114.

In this case, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided so as to pass through any one of the four gaps 121, for example, the lower gap 121. That is, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided so as to pass through the gap 121 when the outer ring member 117 is located at the first position and the second position. The outer ring member 117 constitutes the movable portion of the present invention, and the gap 121 constitutes the gap of the present invention.

By doing so, in addition to securing the installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B as described above, the ball passage 204 can be installed in front of the lower movable effect member 101B while avoiding the outer ring member 117. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball passages 204 and 206 from being formed so as to be separated downward from the lower movable effect member 101B, and to reduce the installation space of the game board 1.

<Structure and operation of upper movable production member 101A>
27 to 48 are diagrams showing the game board 1 in a state in which the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A are moved. In FIG. 27 to FIG. 48, the up, down, left, and right directions are the upper sides viewed from the player. The vertical and horizontal directions of the movable effect member 101A. The upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

In FIG. 27, the upper movable effect member 101A includes a front ornament 160 provided at the forefront portion, a case 161, provided at the rearmost portion, a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164. It is provided with a movable blade rack 165 (see FIGS. 28 and 29), and the case 161 is installed behind the game board 1.

In FIG. 28, the case 161 includes a motor 166, a plurality of gears 167A and 167B, and an arm member 168.

The motor 166 is fixed to the case 161, and rotatably supports the motor gear 166A. The gear 167A meshes with the motor gear 166A and the gear 167B, and the rotation of the motor gear 166A is transmitted to the gear 167B via the gear 167A.

34 and 35, the gear 167B includes a protrusion 167b that rotates integrally with the gear 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves in the rotation direction of the gear 167B as the gear 167B rotates.

28 and 30, the arm member 168 is attached to a swing shaft 168A provided in the case 161. 34 and 35, a slit 168B is formed in the arm member 168, and a projection 167b is slidably fitted in the slit 168B.

The arm member 168 swings up and down with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum as the protrusion 167b slides along the slit 168B as the gear 167B rotates. 28 and 30, a torsion spring 196 is provided on the case 161, and the torsion spring 196 urges the arm member 168 to swing upward.

A slit 168C is formed in the arm member 168, and the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 is fitted in the slit 168C. The case 161 is provided with a curved guide rail 161A, and a fitting protrusion 163A is slidably fitted to the guide rail 161A.

As a result, the arm member 168 is urged by the torsion spring 196 at the standby position to stop in a state of swinging upward along the guide rail 161A.

The fixed base 162 is attached to the case 161, and is fixed to the rear of the game board 1 integrally with the case 161. A rack 162A is provided at a substantially central portion in the width direction of the fixed base 162 (a central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 1). The rack 162A extends in the extending direction (vertical direction) of the fixed base 162, and the rack tooth 162a is formed with rack teeth 162a in which uneven portions are continuous in the vertical direction.

The fixed base 162 is formed with a slit 162B located on the right side of the rack 162A and extending in the vertical direction, and the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 is inserted into the slit 168C of the arm member 168 through the slit 162B. Mated.

The rear movable base 163 is provided movably with respect to the fixed base 162 so as to be positioned in front of the fixed base 162. As a result, the rear movable base 163 becomes movable with respect to the game board 1.

30 and 31, a guide rail 163B is provided on the rear surface of the rear movable base 163 in the widthwise center of the rear movable base 163, and the upper end of the guide rail 163B is open.

In FIG. 30, a slit 163C is formed on the front surface of the rear movable base 163, and the slit 163C communicates with the guide rail 163B. An engaging protrusion 163D is formed on the lower portion of the rear movable base 163, and the engaging protrusion 163D projects forward from the rear movable base 163.

The guide rail 163B slidably holds the rack 162A so as to sandwich the rack 162A from both sides, and the rack tooth 162a projects forward of the rear movable base 163 through the slit 163C. A plurality of gears 169A to 169E are rotatably provided on the front surface of the rear movable base 163 along the vertical direction.

The gear 169A located at the highest position meshes with rack teeth 162a of the rack 162A. When the arm member 168 swings in the vertical direction, the arm member 168 presses the fitting protrusion 163A in the vertical direction.

As a result, the rear movable base 163 moves vertically with respect to the fixed base 162, and the gear 169A rotates along the rack teeth 162a. When the gear 169A rotates, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B to 169D.

29 and 33, a protrusion 164A is provided at the right end of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the protrusion 164A extends in the up-down direction, and the back surface of the front movable base 164. Protruding from the rear.

Rack teeth 164a are formed on the protrusion 164A so as to have a concavo-convex portion continuous in the vertical direction, and a gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a. A central blade member 170 is integrally provided on the front movable base 164, and the central blade member 170 projects leftward and rightward from the front movable base 164.

In FIG. 32, a guide member 164B is provided on the front surface of the front movable base 164 so as to face the left-right direction, and the movable blade rack 165 is supported by the guide member 164B. Racks 165A and 165B are provided in the upper left and right directions of the movable blade rack 165, and the racks 165A and 165B are formed of concavo-convex portions continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165a and 165b facing each other are formed.

In FIG. 33, a rack 165C is provided in the lower part of the central portion in the width direction of the movable blade rack 165, and the rack 165C is formed of uneven portions that are continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165c and 165d that face in opposite directions. Are formed.

In FIG. 32, a pair of slits 165D is formed in the movable blade rack 165, and a fitting protrusion 164C formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164 is slidably fitted in the slit 165D.

As a result, the movable blade rack 165 is movable in the vertical direction with respect to the front movable base 164 along the fitting protrusion 164C.

The front movable base 164 and the movable blade rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171. An engaging portion 165F is provided on the upper portion of the movable blade rack 165, and one end portion of the coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 165F. An engaging portion 164E is provided below the front movable base 164, and the other end of the coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 164E. In FIG. 32, the coil spring 171 is in the maximum contracted state.

The coil spring 171 biases the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 so that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E come close to each other.

An upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175 that are long in the longitudinal direction are attached to the front surface of the front movable base 164. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are located behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position and extend in the left-right direction whose longitudinal direction is the first direction. (See, for example, FIGS. 36 and 38)).

Here, the state in which the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 face the first direction corresponds to the first position. Further, the longitudinal direction and the extending direction refer to the same direction, and the long extending direction in each member is the longitudinal direction and the extending direction.

As shown in FIG. 32, a tooth portion 172A is formed on the right end portion of the upper left blade member 172, and the tooth portion 172A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164G formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164. At the same time, it is meshed with the rack teeth 165b of the movable blade rack 165.

A tooth portion 173A is formed at the left end of the upper right blade member 173. The tooth portion 173A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164H formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. The rack teeth 165a of 165 mesh with each other.

A tooth portion 174A is formed on the right end portion of the lower left blade member 174, and the tooth portion 174A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164I formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. The rack teeth 165d of 165 (see FIG. 33) are in mesh with each other.

A tooth portion 175A is formed on the left end portion of the lower right blade member 175, and the tooth portion 175A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164J formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. It meshes with the rack teeth 165c of 165 (see FIG. 33).

In FIG. 33, an opening 164F is formed in the front movable base 164. An engagement protrusion 165G is formed on the back surface of the movable blade rack 165. As shown in FIG. 40, the engagement protrusion 165G projects rearward through the opening 164F and overlaps the engagement protrusion 163D in the vertical direction.

In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, when the front movable base 164 moves relatively downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 causes the rear movable base 163 to move. It engages with the engagement protrusion 163D (see FIG. 47(b)).

As a result, the movable blade rack 165 is restricted from moving further downward, and the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the movable blade rack 165 against the urging force of the coil spring 171 (FIG. 47 ( See c)).

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the blade movable rack 165, as shown in FIG. 37, the tooth portions 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate. As a result, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing and unite from the first direction in the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (second direction) orthogonal to the horizontal direction.

At the same time, as shown in FIG. 37, the tooth portions 174A and 175A that mesh with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate. As a result, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing and unite from the first direction in the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (second direction) orthogonal to the first direction. ..

In FIG. 37, magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175. Specifically, the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 are provided on the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 so as to face each other in the horizontal direction when the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 move vertically. The magnets 197A and 197B are attracted to each other. As a result, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are brought closer to each other by the magnets 197A and 197B and are attracted to each other to be combined. Note that the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 may be close to each other without being united.

In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are combined so as to face vertically, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 face vertically. The position which is moved so as to be combined with is equivalent to the movable position of the present invention (see FIG. 48). At the movable position, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively extended state from a relatively contracted state (standby state).
In other words, the relatively contracted state means that the overlapping of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 becomes large, and the relatively extended state. That is, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are less overlapped.

27, 28, and 32, the front decoration 160 is fixed to the front movable base 164. 38 and 39, the front decoration 160 has a built-in electric decoration substrate 160A having a plurality of LEDs 160a, and the electric decoration substrate 160A controls the light emission of the LEDs 160a. Further, the front surface of the front decoration 160 is composed of a lens, and the LED 160a emits light through the lens.

The left upper blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 each have a built-in decorative substrate 181 to 184. The decorative boards 181 to 184 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 181a to 184a, and the decorative boards 181 to 184 control the LEDs 181a to 184a for light emission.

The central blade member 170 has a built-in electric circuit board 195. The decorative board 195 includes a plurality of LEDs 195a, and controls the LEDs 195a to emit light.

The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a are composed of, for example, RGB full-color LEDs or the like. In the RGB full-color LED, LEDs of three primary colors of red, green and blue are housed in one package, and different colors can be turned on by appropriately combining these three primary colors. Here, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a are included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

In FIG. 31, a relay board 185 is attached to the back surface of the case 161, and the relay board 185 transmits a control signal to the decorative boards 160A, 181-184, and 195 via the flexible cable 186. The relay board 185 relays the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6) and transmits the control signal to the illumination boards 160A, 181-184, 195 to control the light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a-184a, 195a.

The front surface of the front decoration 160, the central blade member 170, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 of the present embodiment is composed of a lens, and LEDs 160a, 181a. When ~184a and 195a are emitted, the front is clearly illuminated through the lens.

One end 186 a of the flexible cable 186 is connected to the relay board 185. The other end 186b of the flexible cable 186 is attached to the front movable base 164 by being locked in a slit 164K of the front movable base 164, which will be described later.

45 and 46, slits 162C, 162D and 162E are formed in the fixed base 162 vertically. The flexible cable 186 extending forward from the case 161 is wired on the front surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162C and then on the back surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162D.

The flexible cable 186 wired on the back surface of the fixed base 162 is wired in front of the front movable base 164 through the slit 162E.

In FIG. 31, an opening 163a is formed in the upper portion of the back surface of the rear movable base 163, and in FIG. 30, an opening 163b is formed in the lower portion of the surface of the rear movable base 163.

In a state where the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 wired forward from the fixed base 162 passes through the opening 163a of the rear movable base 163 to the rear side. It is housed in the movable base 163, extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163b, and is bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164.

In FIG. 45, a slit 164K is formed in the front movable base 164, and the other end 186b of the flexible cable 186 bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 is the same as the rear movable base 163. It extends upward from below between the front movable bases 164 and is connected to the decorative substrate 195 through the slits 164K.

33, 45, and 46, a clip 199 is attached to the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is locked in the slit 164K by the clip 199. The clip 199 is fixed to the front movable base 164 by a screw 199A (see FIG. 33) so as to cover the slit 164K. The clip 199 has a rib 199a protruding forward, and the rib 199a presses the flexible cable 186 toward the side of the decorative substrate 195 to position the flexible cable 186 (see FIGS. 45 and 46).

The flexible cable 186 is configured to be locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199. However, when the flexible cable 186 that is in contact with the clip 199 does not move at all as a result of being locked, and when the flexible cable 186 can move to some extent And can be included.

Since it suffices to perform positioning as an effect, if a fold line or the like is formed on the flexible cable 186 so as to make contact with the clip 199, even if the flexible cable 186 moves, the fold line will contact the clip 199 and return to the original position. A configuration is also envisioned that will help return.

45 and 46, the slits 162D and 162E arranged vertically in the fixed base 162 are formed with a short vertical distance, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slits 162D and 162E, so that the fixed base is fixed. It is firmly locked to 162 and is prevented from coming off from the fixed base 162. Here, the decorative board 195 is connected to the decorative boards 160A, 181 to 184 via a cable (not shown), and a control signal is transmitted to the decorative boards 160A, 181 to 184 via the decorative board 195. It

30, 45, and 46, a protrusion 198 is provided on the front surface of the fixed base 162, and the protrusion 198 extends from the surface of the fixed base 162 toward the rear movable base 163. ..

As shown in FIG. 45, when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved to the standby position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162. It is bent and accommodated between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the protrusion 198.

That is, the flexible cable 186 is further bent by the protruding portion 198 in a state of being folded and housed between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164.

In this way, the flexible cable 186 is locked by the fixed base 162 and the front movable base 164, is bent from the fixed base 162 by the rear movable base 163, and extends to the front movable base 164 for wiring. ..

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 relatively extend, one end 186a of the flexible cable 186 is a slit of the fixed base 162. 162D, 162E, and the other end 186b extends in a state of being locked by the slit 164K of the front movable base 164 by the clip 199.

In this way, the flexible cable 186 changes between the extended state and the bent state with the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the slit 164K of the front movable base 164 as the starting points.

30, FIG. 31, and FIG. 46, the slits 162C, 162D, 162E of the fixed base 162 and the openings 163a, 163b of the rear movable base 163 are racks 162A provided in the central portion in the width direction of the rear movable base 163. It is formed on the opposite side of the gears 169A to 169E with the pinch in between.

That is, in the rear movable base 163, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the right side of the rear movable base 163, sandwiching the rack 162A at the center in the width direction, and the flexible cable 186 is movable rearward. The base 163 is wired to the other, leftward, with the center portion in the width direction sandwiched therebetween.

In FIG. 31, guide grooves 187 and 188 are formed on the back surface of the case 161, and the guide groove 188 extends in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the guide groove 187. doing. A flexible cable 186 is fitted in the guide grooves 187, 188. The flexible cable 186 is wired from the relay board 185 along the guide grooves 187, 188 and extends forward from the case 161.

The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c inclined downward from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay board 185 and the flexible cable 186 to the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. Have.

The flexible cable 186 is folded back at the position where the other end 187b of the guide groove 187 in the extending direction and the one end 188a of the guide groove 188 in the extending direction communicate with each other and fit in the guide groove 188. To be done. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by a fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187b of the guide groove 187 in the extending direction and the one end 188a of the guide groove 188 in the extending direction communicate with each other.

The guide groove 188 has a bottom surface 188c that is inclined from one end 188a in the extending direction toward the other end 188b in the extending direction.

In FIG. 33, a protrusion 164M is provided on the rear surface of the front movable base 164 on the left side of the front movable base 164. The protrusion 164M extends in the up-down direction of the front movable base 164 so as to face the protrusion 164A in the left-right direction of the game board 1, and protrudes rearward from the front movable base 164.

Rack teeth 164a are formed on the inner surface of the protrusion 164A facing the protrusion 164M. Ribs 164s and 164t are formed on the protrusion 164M and the protrusion 164A, respectively. The ribs 164s and 164t are bent outward in the left and right directions from the rear ends of the protrusion 164M and the protrusion 164A, respectively.

30, 31, 41, and 43, guide grooves 163F and 163G are provided on both left and right sides of the rear movable base 163. The guide grooves 163F and 163G are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the rear movable base 163. Has been extended to. The ribs 164s and 164t (see FIG. 33) of the protrusions 164A and 164M are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 163F and 163G, and the front movable base 164 is movable rearward along the guide grooves 163F and 163G. It moves vertically with respect to the base 163.

In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163v is formed on the front surface on the left side of the rear movable base 163. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164v is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the outer left side of the protrusion 164M of the front movable base 164.

In FIG. 41, the guide surface 163v faces the guide surface 164v in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion 164M moves vertically relative to the rear movable base 163 along the guide groove 163F and the guide surface 163v. ..

In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163w is formed on the front surface on the right side of the rear movable base 163. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164w is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the right outside of the protruding portion 164A of the front movable base 164.

43 and 44, the guide surface 163w faces the guide surface 164w in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion 164A extends vertically with respect to the rear movable base 163 along the guide groove 163G and the guide surface 163w. Move relative.

That is, the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment has the guide grooves 163F and 163G and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w that extend along the longitudinal direction at the side portion of the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is The projections 164A and 164M that extend along the longitudinal direction and that have the ribs 164s and 164t and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w that movably support the guide grooves 163F and 163G and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w are provided.

41 and 43, guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w on the back surface of the front movable base 164. The guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the upper end side with respect to the center of the front movable base 164 in the vertical direction, and project from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w toward the rear movable base 163.

The guide protrusions 190 and 191 have inclined surfaces 190a and 191a and vertical surfaces 190b and 191b extending above the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a and extending in the vertical direction. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are upwardly sloped from the center of the front movable base 164 in the extending direction toward the upper end (corresponding to the end of the present invention).

As a result, the amount of protrusion of the guide protrusions 190, 191 from the guide surfaces 164v, 164w increases toward the upper end of the inclined surface 190a, 191a in the extending direction of the front movable base 164. Therefore, the amount of protrusion of the vertical planes 190b and 191b is the same as the maximum amount of protrusion of the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a, and the same amount of protrusion up to the upper end portion.

Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided at the end portions of the guide surfaces 163v and 163w on the left and right sides of the rear movable base 163, respectively. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided at the lower end of the rear movable base 163 and project from the guide surfaces 163v and 163w toward the front movable base 164.

Thereby, in the state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position and the end of the rear movable base 163 and the end of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical planes 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 are formed. When the lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, the clearance between the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is smaller than the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. It is smaller than the gap between the guide surfaces 163v and 163w and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164.

That is, as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the distance between the guide surfaces 164v, 164w on the guide surfaces 164v, 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x, 163y of the present embodiment. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are such that the separation distance is gradually reduced.

The guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the present embodiment form the first guide portion of the present invention. The guide surfaces 164v and 164w form the second guide portion of the present invention, and the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the present invention are formed on the guide surfaces 164w and 164v. Further, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y form the protrusion of the present invention.

Here, in the present embodiment, the guide portion is a rail (passage, gutter, or the like) that guides the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, but the guide portion is not limited to this and is in contact with or in proximity. If there is an effect of limiting the moving direction of the member, it can be expressed as a guide. In addition, the guide portion can prevent the inclination caused by the gears 169A to 169E that are the drive system being biased to one side in the left-right direction.

Upper stoppers 190z and 191z are provided on the upper ends of the guide surfaces 164v and 164w. The upper stoppers 190z and 191z project from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w to the rear movable base 163.

The upper stoppers 190z and 191z engage the lower stoppers 163x and 163y when the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, so that the front movable base 164 moves the rear movable base 163. To prevent excessive movement.

Here, the case 161 of the present embodiment constitutes the main body member of the present invention, and the fixed base 162 constitutes the main body member and the fixed base of the present invention. The rear movable base 163 constitutes the main body member and the first movable base of the present invention. The rack teeth 162a of the fixed base 162 form the first uneven portion of the present invention, and the rack 162A forms the first rack of the present invention. The gear 169A constitutes the first gear of the present invention, and the gears 169B to 169E constitute the second gear of the present invention. Further, the rack 162A, the gears 169A to 169E, and the protrusion 164A constitute the moving mechanism of the present invention.

The front movable base 164 constitutes the main body member and the second movable base of the present invention, and the engagement protrusion 163D constitutes the first engagement portion of the present invention. The rack teeth 164a form the second uneven portion of the present invention, and the protrusion 164A forms the second rack of the present invention.

The blade movable rack 165 constitutes the third movable base of the present invention, and the engaging projection 165G constitutes the second engaging portion of the present invention. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 form the movable member of the present invention.

The flexible cable 186 constitutes the wiring of the present invention, and the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a constitute the light emitting member of the present invention. The coil spring 171 constitutes the biasing member of the present invention. The relay board 185 constitutes the wiring board of the present invention, and the magnets 197A and 197B constitute the attraction member of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the upper movable effect member 101A will be described.
When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 47(a). Has become. In this state, the upper movable effect member 101A is located behind the decorative member 99 (see FIGS. 3 and 48).

When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, a control signal is transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 to the relay board 185 (see FIG. 31). Based on this control signal, the relay board 185 transmits a control signal to the decorative boards 160A, 181-184, 195 (see FIG. 39) via the flexible cable 186.

The decorative boards 160A, 181-184, and 195 turn on the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a based on the control signal transmitted from the relay board 185 in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position. By controlling the light emission, the color of the decorative member 99 visible from the front is changed, and when the upper movable effect member 101A is in the state of being moved from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member 99 visible from the front of the decorative member 99 is changed. As the color changes, the emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A becomes easy to visually recognize.

The LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a emit the same color as the front decoration 160, for example, blue if the front decoration 160 is blue. As a result, the decorative member 99 emits blue light.

When the front decoration 160 is colored, even if the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a emit white light, the color of the front decoration 160 is from the front of the gaming machine (from the player side). Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A.

If the upper movable effect member 101A moves downward in such a state, the player's line of sight follows the upper movable effect member 101A, and the player's interest gathers in the upper movable effect member 101A and the liquid crystal behind. ..

On the other hand, the front decoration 160 becomes darker (or returns to the original color by losing the light emitting body) due to the disappearance of the light emitting body of the upper movable effect member 101A located at the rear side, and the color change and the brightness. By producing the change of, even the interest of the front ornament 160 will be gathered to the upper movable effect member 101A.

By providing such an effect mode, it is possible to perform an effective effect by the upper movable effect member 101A and the front decoration 160. In particular, when the front decoration 160 is, for example, blue, the upper movable effect member 101A makes the front decoration 160 look like purple by emitting light in red, or the blue color of the front decoration 160 is made of a material. If only the upper movable effect member 101A emits red light, the front decoration 160 is also seen red, if the thickness is only blue.

In any case, by moving the upper movable effect member 101A, the visibility changes because the front ornament 160 loses the light emitting body, while the light emission mode of the upper movable effect member 101A becomes easy to visually recognize. It is thought that the interests of people will improve.

It should be noted that, even when the color for visually recognizing the front ornament 160 is blue when the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a are not emitting light, the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a emit white light. By doing so, the front decoration 160 may be made to appear white.

To move the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position, first, as shown in FIG. 34, the motor 166 is rotated in one direction (forward rotation) from the standby position. When the motor 166 rotates in one direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b provided on the gear 167B moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 35, the arm member 168 swings downward along the guide rail 161A of the case 161 about the swing shaft 168A. At this time, the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted into the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed downward, and the rear movable base 163 moves downward with respect to the fixed base 162, and the fixed base 162 is moved. And the rear movable base 163 relatively extend.

When the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a does not rotate but moves downward together with the rear movable base 163. Accordingly, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, 169D, and the gear 169E moves downward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating.

Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E rotates and moves downward together with the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to. Thus, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 46, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively extended state.

FIG. 47 is a diagram for easily explaining the movement of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165. The movement of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 with the rear movable base 163 fixed. Is drawn.

When the front movable base 164 moves downward as the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 move integrally downward, and the rear movable base 163 moves downward. The engagement protrusion 165G of the movable blade rack 165 engages with the formed engagement protrusion 163D (see FIG. 47(b)).

When the engagement protrusion 165G of the movable blade rack 165 is engaged with the engagement protrusion 163D, the movable blade rack 165 is restricted from moving downward, and only the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. It moves (see FIG. 47(c)).

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, the tooth portions 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate, as shown in FIGS. The 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are swung so as to be oriented in the vertical direction from the state of being oriented in the horizontal direction, and are united.

At the same time, the tooth portions 174A, 175A meshing with the rack teeth 165c, 165d rotate, and the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 swing vertically from the state in which they are oriented in the horizontal direction. And unite.

Since the magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, when the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are oriented in the vertical direction, the lower left portion The blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are attracted by the magnets 197A and 197B.

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the movable blade rack 165 from the state shown in FIG. 47( b ), the inner peripheral upper end of the opening 164</b>F of the movable front rack 164 contacts the engagement protrusion 165</b>G of the movable rack 165. By the contact, the front movable base 164 is restricted from moving downward with respect to the movable blade rack 165. At this time, a gap is formed between the engaging projection 165G and the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164.

When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the movable blade rack 165, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are oriented horizontally. From the state, they are rocked at the same time so that they are united.

When the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 move to a relatively extended state, as shown in FIG. 46, the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the slit 164K of the front movable base 164. The flexible cable 186 extends from the starting point. As a result, the control signal is stably transmitted from the flexible cable 186 to the decorative boards 160A, 181-184, and 195.

In this way, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 move from the relatively contracted state to the relatively extended state, and the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position (FIG. 48). The operation of moving to (see) is completed.

42 and FIG. 44, when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 relatively extend when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. Thus, the ribs 164s, 164t and the guide surfaces 164v, 164w of the protrusions 164A, 164M are supported by the guide grooves 163F, 163G and the guide surfaces 163v, 163w of the rear movable base 163 and move downward.

In the process of the front movable base 164 moving downward with respect to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process of moving from the standby state shown in FIGS. 41 and 43 to the movable position shown in FIGS. After the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 have passed through the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b face the lower stoppers 163x and 163y.

Therefore, in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position and the end portion of the rear movable base 163 and the end portion of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical planes 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 are formed. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, and the gap between the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is a guide of the rear movable base 163 excluding the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. It is smaller than the gap between the surfaces 163v and 163w and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164.

In this way, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, a control signal is transmitted from the relay board 185 to the decorative boards 160A, 181-184, 195 via the flexible cable 186. The decorative boards 160A, 181-184, 195 are LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, which are different in color from the color when the decorative member 99 emits light when they are located at the standby position based on this control signal. 195 is emitted.

When controlling the light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a, the upper movable effect member 101A may continuously emit light of any color until it moves from the standby position to the movable position. Alternatively, the upper movable effect member 101A may emit light of any color when it moves to the movable position. However, it is preferable that the standby position and the movable position emit different colors.

Next, when moving the upper movable effect member 101A from the movable position shown in FIGS. 37 and 39 to the standby position, the motor 166 is rotated in the other direction (reverse rotation) in FIGS. 30 and 35. When the motor 166 rotates in the other direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

As a result, the arm member 168 swings upward with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum and guided by the guide rail 161A of the case 161. At this time, the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted in the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed upward, whereby the rear movable base 163 moves upward with respect to the fixed base 162.

When the rear movable base 163 moves upward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 without rotating. As a result, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, 169D, and the gear 169E moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating.

Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating, the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to. When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 move upward so as to relatively contract.

When the front movable base 164 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the front movable base 164 moves upward by the amount of the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engagement protrusion 165G. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 47B, the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the movable blade rack 165.

Further, the front movable base 164 and the movable blade rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171, and the coil spring 171 connects the front movable base 164 and the movable blade rack 165 so that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E come close to each other. Is urged.

As a result, when the front movable base 164 moves upward by the amount of the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engagement protrusion 165G, the front movable base 164 is assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring 171 to move the blades. It quickly moves upward with respect to the movable rack 165.

When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the movable blade rack 165, as shown in FIG. 36, the tooth portions 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b rotate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the left upper blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are rocked so as to be oriented in the horizontal direction from the state in which they are oriented in the vertical direction, and the union is released.

At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A meshing with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 are rocked so as to be oriented in the horizontal direction from the state in which they are oriented in the vertical direction, and the united state is released.

That is, when the movable blade rack 165 moves upward, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are oriented in the horizontal direction simultaneously from the state in which they are oriented in the vertical direction. Swing to and the union is released.

When the front movable base 164 moves further upward together with the rear movable base 163 while the gear 169E rotates, the front movable base 164 moves relatively upward with respect to the rear movable base 163.

At this time, the front movable base 164 and the movable blade rack 165 integrally move upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, so that the engagement protrusion 165G of the movable blade rack 165 is rearward, as shown in FIG. It is separated upward from the engaging protrusion 163D of the side movable base 163.

When the motor 166 is driven to the initial position and the arm member 168 swings to the upper end of the guide rail 161A of the case 161, the driving of the motor 166 is stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 47A, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state.

Further, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state, as shown in FIG. 45, the flexible cable 186 causes the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 163 to move. It is bent between the bases 164 to be accommodated therein, and is pressed against the protruding portions 198 to be bent.

An opening 163a is formed in the upper part of the back surface of the rear movable base 163 of this embodiment, and an opening 163b is formed in the lower part of the surface of the rear movable base 163. It is accommodated in the rear movable base 163 through the opening 163a of the rear movable base 163, and extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163b.

Accordingly, the flexible cable 186 can be easily wired from the fixed base 162 to the front movable base 164 through the rear movable base 163.

In this way, by moving the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 from the relatively extended state to the relatively contracted state, the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the movable position to the standby position. The movement operation is completed (see FIG. 3).

In the process in which the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process in which the front movable base 164 moves from the deployed state shown in FIGS. 42 and 44 to the standby position shown in FIGS. The lower stoppers 163x, 163y of the front movable base 164 face the guide surfaces 164v, 164w after passing through the inclined surfaces 190a, 191 from the vertical planes 190b, 191b of the guide protrusions 190, 191 of the front movable base 164.

Since the gap between the guide surfaces 164v and 164w and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is larger than the gap between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide protrusions 190 and 191, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relatively opposed to each other. The rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 can be smoothly moved when they move so as to contract.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A moves relative to the rear movable base 163 and the rear movable base 163 that is movably provided with respect to the game board 1. Provided freely on the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 that swingably support the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. The engaging protrusion 163D and the front movable base 164 are slidably provided, and by moving with respect to the front movable base 164, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right portion. A blade movable rack 165 for swinging the blade member 175 between a first position extending in a first horizontal direction and a second position extending in a second vertical direction, and a blade movable rack 165. The rack 165 is provided with an engagement protrusion 165G engageable with the engagement protrusion 163D, and a coil spring 171 having one end attached to the front movable base 164 and the other end attached to the blade movable rack 165. ing.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the upper movable effect member 101A moves so that the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 relatively extend, and the engagement protrusion 165G engages with the engagement protrusion 163D. To slide the movable blade rack 165 to move the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 from the first position to the second position. When swinging and moving from the movable position to the standby position, the coil spring 171 causes the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 to move from the second position to the first position. The movable blade rack 165 is biased so as to swing to the position 1.

Accordingly, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are moved so as to relatively extend, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 172 are moved. The part blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 can be swung from the first position to the second position. As a result, the performance of the upper movable effect member 101A can be enhanced.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the movable position to the standby position, the coil spring 171 causes the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 to move to the second position. Since the blade movable rack 165 is biased so as to swing from the position to the first position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are moved to the second position. The position can be quickly returned to the first position. Thereby, the performance of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved more effectively.

Particularly, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A is fixed to the rear cover 1A, and the case 161 having the rack 162A in which the rack teeth 162a continuous in the longitudinal direction are formed, and the case 161. A rear movable base 163 that is provided movably with respect to the rear gear and has a gear 169A that meshes with the rack teeth 162a, gears 169B to 169E to which power is transmitted from the gear 169A, and an engagement protrusion 163D, and a relative movement with the rear movable base 163. A front movable base 164 having a protrusion 164A that is freely provided and has rack teeth 164a that mesh with the gear 169E continuously in the longitudinal direction, and a front movable base 164 that is movably provided and engages with the engagement protrusion 163D. The movable vane rack 165 having the engaging projection 165G formed thereon and the movable front rack base 164 are provided with the first position and the longitudinal direction in which the longitudinal direction is oriented horizontally along with the movement of the movable vane rack 165. It includes an upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175, which are swingable to a second position that is vertically oriented.

In addition to this, in the upper movable effect member 101A, the upper movable effect member 101A has a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164, and on the guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the rear movable base 163. Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided, and inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are formed on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are provided between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. It is inclined so that the separation distance, which is the distance, becomes gradually narrower.

When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the upper movable effect member 101A and the rear movable base 163 extend in the extending direction so that the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 relatively extend. The blade movable rack 165 causes the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left portion by overlapping the end of the front movable base 164 in the extending direction and engaging the engaging protrusion 165G with the engaging protrusion 163D. The partial blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are swung from the first position to the second position.

Accordingly, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position, the distance between the lower stoppers 163x, 163y and the guide surfaces 164v, 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x, 163y becomes the smallest, The movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, so that the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 have a small overlap (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are (Relatively extended state), when the ends of the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 in the extending direction overlap each other with a short length, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 should be firmly connected. You can As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163 can be moved along the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. .. As a result, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 have a small overlap and a large overlap (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 relatively contract). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly move the upper movable effect member 101A.

In addition to the smallest distance between the lower stoppers 163x, 163y and the guide surfaces 164v, 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x, 163y, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member Since the 174 and the lower right blade member 175 swing from the first position to the second position, the performance of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are provided with lower stoppers 163x and 163y and upper stoppers 190z and 191z, respectively, and face the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. Although the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164 are provided, the invention is not limited to this.

For example, a protrusion (projection or the like) is provided on one of the movable bases (or a guide portion or the like), and there is an inclined surface facing the protrusion, and the inclined surface changes the distance between the protrusion and the inclined surface according to the movement of the movable base. It is possible that the movable base can be changed, and the movement of the movable base can be stabilized by the protrusion and the inclined surface even if the movable base moves. If such an effect can be achieved, the inclined surface, the protrusion, and the movable base can be changed. Each configuration such as the number and the arrangement of is not limited.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a decorative member 99 provided on the game board 1 so as to be positioned in front of the upper movable effect member 101A, and the upper movable effect member 101A has a long left upper part in the longitudinal direction. Provided on the upper blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. And LEDs 181 to 184.

In addition to this, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are located behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position. The longitudinal direction extends in the first direction in which the horizontal direction extends horizontally, and the LEDs 181a to 184a are configured to emit light toward the decoration member 99, and the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position. When moved, they move in a second direction whose longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the first direction and are united. As a result, the performance of the upper movable effect member 101A can be more effectively enhanced.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 have magnets 197A and 197B, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are in the second direction. When moved, they oppose each other in the left-right direction and are attracted by the magnets 197A and 197B.

Thereby, the state where the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are united can be stably maintained. For this reason, the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175, and the left upper blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 that move integrally with the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 are shaken. This can be prevented, and the performance of the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 can be more effectively enhanced.

The magnets 197A and 197B may be attached to the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 instead of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175. 173, the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 may be attached.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided on the game board 1 so as to be located in front of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a provided on the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A located at the standby position. The LED 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a provided with a decorative member 99 that can transmit light is a full-color LED capable of emitting different colors when the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position and the movable position. It is configured.

Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting member such as an LED on the decoration member 99, and the decoration member 99 can be made to emit light by the upper movable effect member 101A. Therefore, the structure of the decorative member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member 99 can be reduced. In addition to this, effects of various colors can be performed by the upper movable effect member 101A, and the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved.

When the upper movable effect member 101A that is emitting light moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member 99 does not emit light as the upper movable effect member 101A moves. At this time, by moving the upper movable effect member 101A downward while keeping the light emitting, the upper movable effect member 101A moving downward while emitting the line of sight of the player can be noticed. Thereby, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be emphasized.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a emit light in the same color as the decorative member 99 when the upper movable effect member 101A is on standby. Can be emphasized, and the performance of the upper movable performance member 101A can be improved more effectively.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a flexible cable 186 connected to the LED 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a of the decorative boards 160A, 181-184, and 195, and the flexible cable 186 is movable to the fixed base 162 and the front side. By being locked to the base 164, it is bent from the fixed base 162 by the rear movable base 163 and extends to the front movable base 164 for wiring.

As a result, when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 move to a relatively extended position and a relatively contracted position, the flexible cable 186 is different from the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164. It is possible to smoothly move the flexible cable 186 while preventing the flexible cable 186 from floating.

In addition to this, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the one left side across the widthwise central axis of the rear side movable base 163, and the flexible cable 186 is arranged in the widthwise central axis of the rear side movable base 163. It is placed on the right side, which is the other side of the line.

This prevents the flexible cable 186 from interfering with the gears 169A to 169E, and moves the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 to a relatively extended position and a relatively contracted position. it can. As a result, the flexible cable 186 can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

Particularly, according to the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the fixed base 162 is provided with the projecting portion 198, and when the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, the flexible cable 186 is connected to the fixed base 162 and the rear side. It is bent and housed between the movable base 163 and between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the protruding portion 198 so as to bend.

Accordingly, the flexible cable 186 folded and housed in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be further bent by the protruding portion 198.

Therefore, the length of the flexible cable 186 accommodated in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is increased to increase the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186. The flexible cable 186 is prevented from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is moved to the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 163. It can be stably accommodated in the base 164.

Furthermore, by further bending the flexible cable 186 by the protruding portion 198, it is possible to generate a restoring force for returning the flexible cable 186 from the bent state to the original state. Therefore, the frictional force generated between the flexible cable 186 and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be increased. Accordingly, the flexible cable 186 can be more effectively prevented from fluttering inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 can be moved to the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base. The base 164 allows more stable storage.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A includes a case 161, a flexible cable 186 provided in the case 161, and a relay board 185 connected to the flexible cable 186.
The case 161 includes a guide groove 187 into which the flexible cable 186 is fitted, and a guide groove 188 that extends in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and into which the flexible cable 186 is fitted. There is. The guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 are formed in an L shape and communicate with each other.

The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c inclined downward from one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay board 185 and the flexible cable 186 to the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187b of the guide groove 187 in the extending direction and the one end 188a of the guide groove 188 in the extending direction communicate with each other. ..

Accordingly, the flexible cable 186 fitted in the guide groove 187 can be extended to the guide groove 188 along the inclined bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187. Therefore, as compared with the case where the one end portion 187a in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 located at the connection position of the flexible cable 186 and the relay substrate 185 has a steep inclination (for example, a step having an inclination of 90°), it is more flexible. It is possible to prevent the cable 186 from bending. Therefore, it is possible to protect the flexible cable 186 by preventing the load from being applied to the connection position between the flexible cable 186 and the relay board 185.

Furthermore, since the flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at the position where the other end 187b of the guide groove 187 in the extending direction and the one end 188a of the guide groove 188 in the extending direction communicate with each other. It is possible to prevent the flexible cable 186 from fluttering at a bent position where the guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

In addition, as the bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187, the one end portion 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay board 185 and the flexible cable 186 is upward toward the other end portion 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. You may incline to.

Here, the combination can mean completion, appearance, driving of a gimmick, etc. of a character for a player by forming a specific design by contact, proximity, and interlocking of game members. This represents performing an effect or the like.

In particular, when performing an effect accompanied by such a combination, there is a case where a big hit is notified or a big hit expectation degree (probability and reliability of a big hit when the corresponding effect is executed) is high. With the appearance of a specific design, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game machine and to improve the expectation of the game itself.

Also, the usage method is not limited to this, and pseudo ream, reach, special combination, small hit, BB, RB, reel lock, pseudo bonus, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), ART (assist). It is assumed that it is used for various notifications such as replay time), CT (chance time), and CZ (chance zone).

In addition, this embodiment can be used in a pachi-slot machine, a pachinko machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like. As the game medium, in addition to the ball and the medal, the number of game media in the data (balls, balls, balls to lend) , Game balls, credits, number of inputs, number of shots, number of payouts, number of foul balls, etc.) It is also possible to apply to a gaming machine in which the number of gaming media on the data increases or decreases. In addition, the balls, the balls, the balls to lend, and the balls to be stored can be applied to various game media such as balls and medals. Further, the number of outs of the gaming machine may be counted using an outbox or other peripheral device.

<Structure and operation of left movable effect member 271 and right movable effect member 272>
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a left movable effect member 271 and a right movable effect member 272. The left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 are provided on the left and right sides behind the game board 1 with the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 interposed therebetween.

As shown in FIG. 121, the left movable effect member 271 is provided with an upper cover 273 fixed at the rear of the game board 1, and a left sword member 274 is swingable on a swing shaft 273A of the upper cover 273. Installed.

The left sword member 274 is a member that imitates a sword extending vertically. An arm portion 275 is integrally provided on the upper part of the left sword member 274, and a slit 275A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the arm portion 275.

A motor 276 is attached to the upper cover 273, and a motor gear 276A is provided on the shaft of the motor 276. Gears 277A, 277B, and 277C are rotatably provided on the upper cover 273, and the gear 277A meshes with the motor gear 276A. A fitting protrusion 277c is integrally provided on the motor gear 277C, and the fitting protrusion 277c is slidably fitted in the slit 275A.

The right movable effect member 272 includes a lower cover 278 fixed behind the game board 1, and a right sword member 279 is swingably attached to a swing shaft 278A of the lower cover 278.

The right sword member 279 is a member that imitates a sword extending vertically. An arm portion 280 is integrally provided below the right sword member 279, and a slit 280A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the arm portion 280.

A motor 281 is attached to the lower cover 278, and a shaft of the motor 281 is provided with a motor gear 281A. Gears 282A and 282B are rotatably provided on the lower cover 278, and the gear 282A meshes with the motor gear 281A.
A fitting protrusion 282b is integrally provided on the motor gear 282B, and the fitting protrusion 282b is slidably fitted in the slit 280A.

Next, the operation of the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 will be described.
In the state where the left movable effect member 271 is located at the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the left sword member 274 is vertically extended. When the motor 276 rotates clockwise in the clockwise direction from the state in which the left movable effect member 271 is located at the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates counterclockwise. Rotate to. When the gear 277C rotates counterclockwise, the fitting protrusion 277c moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C along the slit 275A.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the left sword member 274 swings in the counterclockwise direction from the standby position and moves to the expanded position which is obliquely inclined in the display area 4A.

On the other hand, in the state where the right movable effect member 272 is located at the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the right sword member 279 extends vertically. When the motor 281 rotates forward in the counterclockwise direction from the state where the right movable effect member 272 is located at the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A and the gear 282B moves in the counterclockwise direction. Rotate. When the gear 282B rotates counterclockwise, the fitting protrusion 282b moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B along the slit 280A.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the right sword member 279 swings in the counterclockwise direction from the standby position, and moves to the expanded position inclining in the display area 4A. The left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272, for example, simultaneously move from the standby position to the deployed position, and are in a state of being diagonally connected at the deployed position.

On the other hand, in the left sword member 274, when the motor 276 reversely rotates counterclockwise from the deployed state, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates clockwise. To do. When the gear 277C rotates clockwise, the fitting protrusion 277c moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C along the slit 275A. As a result, the left sword member 274 swings clockwise from the deployed position to retract from the display area 4A, and returns to the vertically extended state at the standby position.

In the right sword member 272, when the motor 281 reversely rotates in the clockwise direction from the deployed state, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A and the gear 282B rotates in the clockwise direction. When the gear 282B rotates clockwise, the fitting protrusion 282b moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B along the slit 280A. As a result, the right sword member 279 swings clockwise from the deployed position to retract from the display area 4A, and returns to the vertically extended state at the standby position.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127.

123 to 127 are diagrams showing another embodiment of the game board 1. In FIG. 123, on the right side of the game area 1p of the game board 1, a passage gate 251, a second starting opening 252, a blade member 253, a first big winning opening 254, a second big winning opening 255, a first big winning opening 254. A first special winning opening shutter 254A for opening and closing, a second special winning opening shutter 255A for opening and closing the second special winning opening 255, and a general winning opening 40D are provided.

The passage gate 251 gives an opportunity to open the second starting port 252. The winning of the game ball to the passage gate 251 is detected by the passage gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passage gate 251, no prize ball is generated.

The first special winning opening shutter 254A switches the first special winning opening 254 to an open state or a closed state by performing an opening/closing operation so as to have a forward tilted/retracted attitude in the front-back direction of the game board 1. It is arranged to cover the first special winning opening 254 in the closed state.

The second special winning opening shutter 255A switches the second special winning opening 255 to an open state or a closed state by performing an opening/closing operation so as to have a forward tilted/retracted posture in the front-back direction of the game board 1. It is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening 255 in the closed state.

The first special winning opening shutter 254A and the second special winning opening shutter 255A are driven by a first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A and a second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6), respectively.

The game board 1 is provided with a ball passage unit 256 shown in FIGS. The ball passage unit 256 is located below the passage gate 251 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 125), and an outlet 257 through which a game ball that has won the second starting opening 252 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 125) is ejected. And a ball passage 258 communicating with the discharge port 257, extending downward from the discharge port 257, and discharging the game balls discharged from the discharge port 257 to the downstream side.

An opening 259 that opens to the side of the game board 1 is formed on the upper right side of the outlet 257, and the opening 259 communicates with the game area 1p.

The second starting opening 252 is such that the difficulty of winning the prize is determined by the blade member 253 as an ordinary electric accessory, and the winning of the game ball at the second starting opening 252 is determined by the second starting opening switch 330 (FIG. 6)).

The blade member 253 moves in the front-rear direction so as to have a projecting posture/retracting posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the second starting opening 252 and a second state. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between the closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win the game ball of the 2 starting port 252. The blade member 253 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

When the blade member 253 is in the open state, the game ball passing through the passage gate 251 wins the second starting opening 252, and when the blade member 253 is in the closed state, the game ball passing through the passage gate 251 is the first game ball. 2 After the blade member 253 is contacted without winning in the starting port 252, it is discharged to the game area 1p through the opening 259.

The ball passage unit 256 is provided with a discharge port 260, and the game balls that have won the general winning opening 40D are discharged to the ball passage 258 through the discharge port 260.

A ball passage 259 communicates with the lower end of the ball passage 258, and the ball passage 259 extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 from the lower end of the ball passage 258. The ball passage 258 and the ball passage 259 are formed such that the passage area, which is the cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls pass, is about two or more game balls. Thereby, in the ball passages 258, 259, the game balls can pass side by side in the front-back direction of the game board 1.

A general winning opening right switch 400B is provided in the ball passage 258 below the discharging opening 260, and the general winning opening right switch 400B detects a game ball that has been won in the general winning opening 40D and discharged to the discharging opening 260. To do.

The ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 262. The ball passage 262 is located below the first big winning opening 254, and the game balls that have won the first big winning opening 254 are discharged to the ball passage 262.

In FIG. 126, a ball passage 263 communicates with the lower portion (downstream) of the ball passage 262. 124 to 126, the ball passage 263 is located above the ball passage 259 and extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 together with the ball passage 259.

As a result, the game balls won from the first special winning opening 254 are discharged to the ball passage 263 through the ball passage 262, and are discharged toward the left (downstream) of the game board 1 along the ball passage 263.

125 and 126, the ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 264. The ball passage 264 is located below the second special winning opening 255, and the game balls entered in the second special winning opening 255 are discharged to the ball passage 264.

In FIG. 127, the ball passage 264 communicates with the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263. Therefore, the game balls that have won the first big winning opening 254 are discharged to the left (downstream) of the game board 1 through the ball passage 263, and the ball passage 264 in the middle of the ball passage 263. It is divided into those discharged to the ball passage 259 through

In FIGS. 124 and 125, the downstream end of the ball passage 259 and the downstream end of the ball passage 263 are joined by the joining portion 265, and the game balls discharged downstream along the ball passage 259 or the ball passage 263 are , Are merged at the merging portion 265 and are discharged to the back surface of the game board 1. That is, the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263 discharge the game balls winning the first big winning opening 254 and the second big winning opening 255 to the back surface of the game board 1.

Further, since the ball passage 259 communicates with the ball passage 258, the game balls that have won the second starting opening 252 and the general winning opening 40D are discharged from the ball passage 258 through the ball passage 259 to the confluence portion 265. That is, the game ball discharged to the ball passage 258 and the ball passage 263 can be discharged to the ball passage 259.

Here, the first special winning opening 254 of the present embodiment constitutes the first winning opening of the present invention, and the second special winning opening 255 constitutes the second winning opening of the present invention. The ball passage 263 constitutes the first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 259 constitutes the second game medium passage of the present invention.

The ball passage 259 of the present embodiment has a passage area which is an area of a cross section (front-rear direction of the game board 1) orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls pass (the left-right direction of the game board 1) than the passage area of the ball passage 263. Largely formed.

The ball passage 263 communicates with the ball passage 264 separately from the confluence portion 265. As a result, the game balls that have won the first special winning opening 254 can be discharged to the ball passage 259 through the ball passage 264.

Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball passage 259 is the area of a cross section that joins the ball passage 263 downstream of the second special winning opening 255 and is orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls pass. The passage area is formed to be larger than the passage area of the ball passage 263, and the ball passage 264 is provided as a communication portion that communicates with the ball passage 263, separately from the joining portion 265 that is a joining portion with the ball passage 263. In addition, the game balls that have won the first special winning opening 254 can also be discharged to the ball passage 259 through the ball passage 264, so that the game balls that have won the first special winning opening 254 are blocked downstream thereof. Can be prevented. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the playability can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the two special winning openings 254 and 255 are provided, but three or more special winning openings may be provided. Further, although two ball passages 259 and 263 are provided, three or more ball passages may be provided corresponding to the number of special winning openings. In addition, the game medium passage may be provided in a game board, a spacer, or the like as long as it can guide or discharge the game medium from the winning opening.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 128, an upper movable effect member 101A is installed behind the decorative member 99 (see FIG. 3), and a lens 289 is installed on the right side of the upper movable effect member 101A. An illumination substrate 290 is installed behind the lens 289. The decorative substrate 290 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 291 that emit light of a single color (for example, white). The LED 291 emits light toward the decorative member 99 through the lens 289. Here, the LED 291 is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a, which are full-color light emitters of the present embodiment, constitute the first light emitting unit of the present invention, and the LED 291 which is a single color light emitter, constitutes the second light emitting unit. Further, the front decoration 160 including the blue lens member constitutes the lens member of the present invention.

Next, the operation will be described.
When the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position, it emits light so as to match the emission mode with the single-color LED 291. Specifically, since the front decoration 160 is blue, it emits light in green so that the color transmitted from the front decoration 160 becomes white.

As a result, the color emitted from the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a becomes similar to the color of the LED 291, and the decorative member 99 emits white light. Here, it is conceivable that the decoration member 99 emits light in dark white by superimposing green light on the blue front decoration 160. In this case, the lens of the decoration member 99 or the lens of the decoration member 99 is used. By providing a diffusion sheet or the like in the vicinity, it is possible to diffuse the light from the upper movable effect member 101A and the light from the LED 219 to the decoration member 99 and adjust the light emission mode of the decoration member 99.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decoration member 99 emits light by the LED 291, and the upper movable effect member 101A emits light in a color different from that of the LED 291, so that the upper movable effect member 101A. It is possible to more effectively improve the rendering performance.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A is controlled to emit light according to the expectation of the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 4, or when the LED 291 emits white light according to the expectation of the effect, the standby position is set. The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a may be controlled to emit light so that the upper movable effect member 101A looks the same color at the movable position.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a emit light when the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position, so that the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a visually recognized from the front. Since it is possible to change the color of the light 195a to a color similar to that of the LED 291, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting portion such as an LED on the decorative member 99, and the upper movable effect member 101A emits light to the decorative member 99. it can.

In addition to this, the mounting amount of the full-color LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a can be reduced, and the decoration member 99 can emit light of the same color (white). As a result, the structure of the decorative member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member 99 can be reduced.

Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A is in the state of being moved from the standby position to the movable position, it is possible to change the color of the decorative member 99 visually recognized from the front of the decorative member 99. Can be performed and the performance of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved.

In addition, for example, if the effect of moving the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position while the light is emitted, the upper movable effect member 101A that moves while emitting the line of sight of the player can be noticed. Thereby, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be emphasized.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later, the non-probability variation/non-time saving gaming state and the special symbol lottery winning probability are non- There is a probability variation game state (special game state) that is higher than the probability variation/non-time saving game state, and a time saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the probability probability/non time saving game state, and in the normal game state If you win the special symbol lottery, it shifts to the big hit game state (specific game state).

In the time saving game state, since the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery becomes a high probability state, it becomes easy to win the second starting opening 33 by the support of the blade member 34 as the ordinary electric throwing object. This state is a so-called "electric support", and it becomes easy to accumulate reserved balls of a special symbol game described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning the second start opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving game state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving game state 2). ), which means at least one of the states (time saving game state 3) in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long. For example, the time saving game state includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time saving game state 3 simultaneously proceed in any combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize is successfully won in the specific area 38A in the jackpot gaming state, the certainty transition/shorter time gaming state (the regular variation gaming state which is the certainty variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state) is always transferred, and It is adapted not to shift to the probability variation/non-time saving game state (the non-probability variation game state and the normal game state which is the non-time saving game state). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends with non-V winnings without succeeding in the V winning in the specific area 38A, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the non-probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state are normal gaming states. To move to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state is ended, for example, in the probability variation/time saving game state, 180 times of the special symbol lottery (variation display or stop display of 180 times of the special symbol) is triggered, It is designed to shift to a certain variation/non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state, for example, 100 times or 4 times in the special symbol lottery (variable display or stop display of the special symbol 100 times or 4 times) in the non-probability variation/time saving game state , It is designed to shift to an uncertain variation/non-time saving game state. It should be noted that, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability variation/time saving game state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state. In the following description, the probability variation game state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery like this embodiment is also referred to as ST (SPECIAL 1 TIME) game state.

The upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B are installed in a state of being retracted from the central portion of the display area 4A behind the game board 1 when not in operation (see FIG. 3). The upper movable effect member 101A appears at a movable position in front of the center of the display area 4A (see FIGS. 19 and 48) when a specific effect is performed, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are formed. The lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are movable and emit light. The lower movable effect member 101B appears at a lower movable position in the front of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and moves the outer ring member 117 in a radial direction and emits light. Further, the lower movable effect member 101B moves and emits the outer ring member 117 in the radial direction at the standby position below the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the second special winning opening 37, and is attached below the first special winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms the second special winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located at the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37. In addition, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second special winning opening 37 is provided at the front edge of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a spherical passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B via the second special winning opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, a normal symbol display portion 51, a normal symbol hold display portion 52, a first special symbol display portion 53, It has a 2 special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not particularly shown, the lamp/LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes one corresponding to a character appearance notification lamp, and a transition to the big hit game state is confirmed. It lights up (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the big hit game state, or when the special symbol changes in the game state. It is like this.

The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting opening 33 by driving the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins the passage gate 35. The result of the lottery for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display portion 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be turned on in red and blue, for example, and lights up in red in the case of winning in the normal symbol game, and lights up in blue in the case of losing in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display portion 51 is turned on, for example, in a red state, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 33. It should be noted that the lighting pattern according to the winning and the loss of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode, for example, in the case of winning, it becomes a lighting state or a blinking state, while in the case of losing it becomes a non-lighting state. You can

Ordinary symbol reservation display unit 52, by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, a new game ball wins the passage gate 35 while the ordinary symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display. When it does, it displays the number of times that the variable display of the normal symbol that has been suspended for performing the variable display by the normal symbol display unit 51 after the next time can be performed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display portion 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamp 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the hold number is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are turned on.

The first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 show the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that is identification information triggered by winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 32, and first. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol") that is identification information triggered by winning a game ball to the second starting opening 33, and secondly. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting opening 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 realize identification information display means.

The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED or the like, and each segment is repeatedly turned on and off individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (design) formed by turning on/off each segment of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed in the second special symbol are in different modes. As the winning symbol of the first special symbol, a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, such as "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is possible after the termination of the big hit gaming state. There are nominal big hit symbols and nominal big hit symbols such as "time saving 1" to "time saving 5" that indicate a transition to a non-probable and short time gaming state after the completion of the big hit gaming state (see FIG. 50). As the winning symbol of the second special symbol, there is a symbol that triggers the transition to the big-hit gaming state, and there is a name big-hit symbol such as "probability variation 1" that indicates that the big-hit gaming state can transition to the probability variation gaming state. Yes (see FIG. 50). That is, the winning symbol of the first special symbol, there is a big hit symbol indicating that it shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game state, but the hit symbol of the second special symbol has a time saving game state after the big hit game state. There is no jackpot design that indicates that it will shift to. The first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of turning on/off two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and by turning on or off these LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, the first special symbol display unit 53 Or, for the variable display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 during the variable display of the symbols for the special symbol game by the second special symbol display unit 54. The feasible number of times (suspended number) of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 that has been suspended is displayed. The second special symbol reservation display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, the first special symbol display unit 53. Or, the second special symbol display unit 54 is held for variable display of symbols for the next special symbol game when a new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during variable display of symbols for the special symbol game. The feasible number (holding number) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 are arranged side by side vertically, and are located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of reservations on the normal symbol reservation display unit 52.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, to the first starting opening 32 The game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port 33. When it is done, execution (start) of variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended. When the symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 that has been suspended. The variable display of symbols is started.

Here, the upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the The number of variable displays held by the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 due to the winning of the game ball into the 2 starting opening 33 is set to four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (Fig. 6) 1st special symbol starting memory area (0) is remembered as starting memory (starting memory information), the information of the 4th 1st special symbol game which is reserved, 1st special symbol starting memory area ( 1) ~ the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is stored as starting memory. Similarly, for the second special symbol game, when four times are held, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 ( 0) is stored as starting memory (starting memory information), and the information of the second special symbol game for four times held is the second special symbol starting memory area (1) to the second special symbol starting memory area (4 ) Is stored as a start memory. Therefore, the total number of winning prizes to both the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, that is, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, is eight at maximum.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 It is also possible to display the suspension of winning in the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of winning in the second starting opening 33.

The round display section 59 is lit up while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the jackpot gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “16R”), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when setting a big hit game state of a number of rounds different from the number of rounds, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on, and the other LED lamps are turned off. You can The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may be an ordinal number indicating the order in which round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, it is described as “16 rounds” or “16R”, and when the latter is meant, it is described as, for example, “16Rth”. Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged at the rear of the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting mouth 33, various images related to the game, for example, identification symbols for effects, effect images in the normal game state, effects during the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to perform variable display of the identification information on the condition that the game ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp/LED 27 constitute an effect execution means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect executing means are also used as informing means.

[Electrical structure of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling the game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable/writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I/O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmitting unit, and a backup capacitor 67. Equipped with. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61, the specific game state transition determination means (first specific game state transition determination means and second specific game state transition determination means), specific game state control means, special game state control means , And round game executing means (first round game executing means and second round game executing means) are realized.

To the main control circuit 60, a first starting port switch 320 arranged behind the first starting port 32 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

To the main control circuit 60, a second starting port switch 330 arranged behind the second starting port 33 is connected. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

The first start opening switch 320 and the second start opening switch 330 are determined to have won a prize when a game ball has entered the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, and a predetermined detection signal is given. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

To the main control circuit 60, a passage gate switch 350 arranged behind the passage gate 35 is connected. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display portion 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image that makes the player understand that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do it.

The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a prize has been won when detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 35. Thereby, the passage gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second starting opening 33.

In the main control circuit 60, a general winning opening left switch 400A arranged behind the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 and a general winning arranged behind the general winning opening 40D. The mouth right switch 400B is connected. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of prize balls are played by the payout device 83.

To the main control circuit 60, a first special winning opening count switch 360 arranged behind the first special winning opening 36 is connected. The first special winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first special winning opening 36. When the winning of the game balls is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 360, the payout device 83 causes the upper plate 17 or the lower plate through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21 to use the preset number of the game balls as the prize balls. The dish 18 is paid out.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second special winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second special winning opening 37. The second special winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the second special winning opening 37. When the winning of the game balls is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of the game balls as the prize balls through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21 to obtain the upper plate 17. Alternatively, the lower plate 18 is paid out.

The first special winning opening count switch 360 and the second special winning opening count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when the game ball passes through the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. Supply to the circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 on the assumption that V is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed the non-specific area 38B in the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A that drives the first special winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first special winning opening 36, and a second special winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second special winning opening 37. The second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first special winning opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which the gaming balls can enter the first winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the gaming balls is impossible or difficult. Then, in a situation where the first special winning opening 36 is at least closed, the second special winning opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which the game balls can be won in the second special winning opening 37, and the winning of the game balls. Is driven into a closed state that is impossible or difficult. The opening drive of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 by the first big winning opening shutter 36A and the second big winning opening shutter 37A is performed by the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display. It is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the section 54 and the big hit game state is entered.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emitting mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined period of time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 33. It becomes easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0 in the game state that is not the time saving game state (in the present embodiment, the “non-probability variation/non-time saving game state”) (for example, be drawn by lottery). No win is determined) and the blade member 34 is not opened. On the other hand, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in a high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 1/1 (for example, the winning is determined without being drawn by lot), and when this is won, the blade member 34 is 1 Open for 3 seconds 3 times.

The main control circuit 60 controls a displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. Accordingly, when the round game to be described later is being executed in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, if the displacement member 39 is closed even in the big hit game state, it becomes difficult or difficult for the game ball to pass the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol hold display unit 55, when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, if a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the first based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32. Execution (start) of variable display of special symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of holdings related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol reservation display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed, 1st special symbol display section 53 or 2nd special symbol display section 54 until the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol which is being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 33 Execution (start) of variable display of special symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of holdings related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the winning order.

In addition, the upper limit is set as described above for the number of pending executions of variable display of special symbols, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 sets the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The maximum number of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is detected and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, respectively, is four at maximum. (That is, the number of times of detection is four), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of reservations. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the number of holdings is again increased up to four.

When the holding number of the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display portion 53 is held up to, for example, four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display portion 53 is the main RAM 63 1 special symbol starting memory area (0) is remembered as starting memory, after that, the information of the special symbol game where the number of reservations is 4 is in 1st special symbol starting memory areas (1)-(4) of main RAM63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

Similarly, regarding the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of holding the second special symbol game is held up to, for example, four, it corresponds to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as a start memory in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for which the number of holdings is 4 is the first of the main RAM 63. 2 Special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

Therefore, the total number of game balls to be reserved for the special symbol game associated with winning the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is four, respectively.

In the opened state of the first special winning opening 36 by the first special winning opening shutter 36A, the count value by the first special winning opening count switch 360 (the number of winning game balls) becomes a predetermined number (for example, nine winning numbers). It is maintained until either one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, has elapsed. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first special winning opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first special winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first big winning opening 36. To be done.

Similarly, in the open state of the second special winning opening 37 by the second special winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second special winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, the number of winning is 9). Or a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, elapses, until either condition is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second special winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second special winning opening shutter 37A is driven so as to close the second special winning opening 37. To be done.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game, the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game. The states up to are also referred to as “game between rounds”, “interval between rounds”, or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 may be opened and closed multiple times. Further, in one round game, the open/closed state of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one special winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other special winning opening is continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is not provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from the big hit game state, but may be provided with a small hit game state. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, for example, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be opened only once. However, when a small hit game state is provided, the arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. Further, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting gaming state may be changed to a gaming state different from the gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming state, and the gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming state. It is also possible to return to.

The round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as the first round, and the second round game may be referred to as the second round. In the following description (including the drawings referred to along with the description), a “round” with a number such as 1 round or 1st round is simply “R” such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R. ] In a round game, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times. When reaching, the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are closed, and the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are not opened for the remaining number of times of opening. , The round game is ended.

Further, in the specific round game in which the second special winning opening 37 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A becomes the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot gaming state. That is, in a specific round game, a game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize. On the other hand, in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball is temporarily won in the second special winning opening 37. Even if it does, the game ball becomes impossible or difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) include jackpot gaming state (first specific gaming state) including a specific round game, and jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) not including a specific round game. There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except for a specific case. Designs (decorative designs), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”,...

On the other hand, when the special symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, when the special symbol that has been changed and stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is to grasp that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in one of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that many exits can obtain. When the display is stopped, the combination of the decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in each of a plurality of symbol columns) The display image for big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 enters a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (first start opening 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, on condition that the game medium has passed through the second start area (second start opening 33). It functions as a second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 controls the game state to the specific game state on the condition that the determination result indicating that the first or second specific game state transition determining unit shifts to the specific game state is obtained. Function as.

Further, the main CPU 61, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state, after the specific game state is finished, the determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state Functions as special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (probability variation game state) that is relatively easy to obtain.

Further, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, a first round game (round) in which the first variable winning device (first big winning opening shutter 36A) is changed to a first mode (open state) and a second mode (closed state). It functions as a first round game execution means for executing a game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game executing means, can control the first variable winning device to change between the first mode and the second mode while executing the first round game at least once.

Further, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, the second round game (round) in which the second variable winning device (second big winning opening shutter 37A) is changed to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state). It functions as a second round game execution means for executing a game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as a second round game executing means, is a specific round game mode in which it is relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the second variable winning device to the specific region 38A during execution of at least one second round game. It is possible to play a specific second round game in which control is performed to vary the first mode and the second mode. Also, during execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which passage of the game medium to the specific area 38A is relatively difficult. It is also possible to control.

The jackpot gaming state is that the first round game execution means executes the first specified number of times of the first round game, and then the second round game execution means executes at least one specified second round game. 1 specific game state, the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution unit after the first specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution unit, After the first round game execution means executes the second specific number of first round games, which is larger than the first specific number of times, and then the second round game execution means executes at least one specific second round game. 3 specific game state, and a fourth specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means after the second specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game executing means. A specific game state including is realized.

A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described below, including various functions of the main CPU 61 described above, and various tables.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable/writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I/O port 65 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and outputs output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal board 80. ..

The external terminal board 80 is provided between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall staff member and a function of displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication.

The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first starting opening switch 320, a second starting opening switch 330, a passage gate switch 350, a first big winning opening count switch 360, and a second big winning opening count switch 370. The specific area switch 380A, the non-specific area switch 380B, the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, and the backup clear switch 81 are included.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout/launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, when the power is cut off or the like according to the operation of the hall manager.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 via the dispensing/launching control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout/launch control circuit 82. The payout/launching control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and is connected to the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout/launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 implement a game value giving means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball in accordance with a player's operation, and a signal can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout/launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Thereby, the payout device 83 is caused to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83 pays out, for example, three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the first starting opening 32, and one game ball as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the second starting opening 33. Payout, and pay out 10 game balls as the number of prize balls per winning a prize in the general winning holes 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, per winning prize in the first big winning hole 36 or the second big winning hole 37 14 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls.

The payout/firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) depending on the amount of rotation when the firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. The electric power is supplied to and the game ball is controlled to be fired toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that a command is supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. The lamp/LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B (motor 110A, motor 166), the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 (motor 276). , A motor 281), a movable effect device 42 including a mechanism and the like are connected.

Further, the sub-control circuit 70 is connected with a push-down operation button switch 90A provided on the push-down operation button 9A and is also connected with a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push-down operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-down operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a push-down operation signal from the push-down operation button switch 90A and a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit, and the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c function as a music output unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes a display control means, an advance notification means, a scheduled addition quantity determination means, a notification quantity change means, and an effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the word RAM 73 implement storage means. The effect pattern selection means includes a music pattern selection means.

The liquid crystal display device 4 displays a round number notification image (for example, an icon indicating the number of rounds) of at least a part of the number of times the round game is executed by the first round game executing means and the second round game executing means in the specific game state. ) Functions as a display means capable of displaying. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as a display control unit that controls the display unit (the liquid crystal display device 4).

The sub CPU 71 executes a predetermined specific game state (a round game in which the first special winning opening 36 is changed to an opening mode and a closing mode) by the specific game state transition determining means is executed a plurality of times, and the second special winning opening 37 is opened. The specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means on condition that it is decided to shift to the big hit game state in which the round game to be changed to the mode and the closed mode is executed at least once. Previously, it functions as a prior notification means capable of executing prior notification for notifying that the specific second round game will be executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit capable of displaying the number-of-rounds notification image based on the execution time of the advance notification by the advance notification unit.

The sub CPU 71, in the specific game state, the number of times of the actual round game (round game in which winning in the first big winning opening 36 is easy) executed by the first round game executing means (main CPU 61), and the actual round. The upper limit number (upper limit number of winnings) of game media accepted to the first variable winning device (first big winning opening 36) and the acceptance of the game medium to the first variable winning device, which are defined for one game. It is executed by the second round game execution means (main CPU 61) and the number of game values (game balls) given by the game value giving means (payout device 83) for each number (winning number). The number of real round games (round games that make it easy to win the second big winning opening 37) and the second variable winning device (second big winning opening) defined for one real round game. 37) on the basis of the upper limit number of game media accepted (upper limit winning number) and the number of game value grants given by the game value granting unit for each accepted number of game media to the second variable winning device. It functions as a scheduled grant quantity determining means for determining the scheduled grant quantity of the game value.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a notifying means capable of notifying a part of the planned provision quantity determined by the planned provision quantity determination means, and the sub CPU 71 informs the quantity notified by the notification means. It functions as an informing quantity changing means that can be changed within the range of the planned giving quantity determined by the giving quantity determining means.

The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection unit capable of selecting an effect pattern according to the type of a specific game state (big hit game state), and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp/LED 27 are effects. Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selecting means, it functions as an effect executing means capable of executing an effect in the specific game state.

The sub CPU 71 has a plurality of musical composition patterns (for example, musical composition pattern A (success), musical composition pattern A (reverse), musical composition pattern A (failure), musical composition pattern B (success), musical composition pattern in a specific game state (big hit game state). B (reverse), music pattern B (failure), music pattern C (decision)) function as music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern, and the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c are selected by the music pattern selection means. It functions as a music output unit that outputs a music corresponding to the music pattern in the special game state.

The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute an item prefetch effect (item effect) described below, determines effect contents in the item prefetch effect (item effect), and controls the progress of the item prefetch effect (item effect). The liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamps/LEDs 27 function as an effect control unit and an item advance notification determining unit that determines whether or not to perform a prior notification effect described later. ) And the item notification execution means for executing the preliminary notification effect.

The sub CPU 71 functions as a story effect control unit that controls the progress of a series of story effects and related story effects, which will be described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp/LED 27 cause the series of story effects and It functions as a story production execution means for executing a related story production.

A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores programs and tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and for example, an image data processor (VDP) and for generating various image data. The image data ROM stores data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing the image data, and a D/A converter for converting the image data as an image signal. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D/A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the sounds (voices, songs, etc.) to be output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c. For example, a sound source IC for controlling the sounds and sound data for storing various sound data. It includes a ROM and an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying a sound signal. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the configuration is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sounds to be output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and one of the plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Sound data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. The amplifier amplifies the sound signal and outputs the sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp/LED 27 including a decoration lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of kinds of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It consists of It should be noted that the configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79, for example, in the big hit game state, the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B are respectively in the standby positions by operating the pressing operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. (See FIG. 3) and a movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48) are controlled.

[Game state and production mode of gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The game state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a time saving mode, and an ST mode as effect modes in the normal gaming state. In the time-saving mode, as a performance, there are relatively many time-saving modes, and a short mode that gives an impression that the time-saving mode has a relatively small number of games (the number of special symbol variations, that is, the number of special symbol games). There is a long mode that gives an impression that it is the number of games. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the effect mode in the big hit game state, the first special symbol is being hit, the live bonus, the story bonus, and the battle bonus, the second special symbol is being hit, the SP bonus. Has been implemented.

The normal mode is a non-probable and non-time saving game mode effect mode. The normal mode is an effect mode in which the player stays when neither the time saving mode, the ST mode, nor the first special symbol hitting, nor the second special symbol hitting. For example, in the time saving mode, when the special symbol game is exhausted 4 times (short mode) or 100 times (long mode), the time saving mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the ST mode, when the special symbol game is played 180 times (specified number of times), the ST mode is shifted to the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, the first special symbol is being hit, the live bonus, the story bonus. , Or shift to the battle bonus. In the normal mode, based on the start memory information of the above-mentioned second special symbol, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, the second special symbol is being hit, to the SP bonus. Migrate in some cases.

Further, as the combination mode of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" will be stopped and displayed, but when the stop mode is displayed as the combination mode of "7" , It is confirmed that it is a big hit symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol, and is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3", "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol. ~ High probability of being a jackpot symbol corresponding to "probability variation 6", when it is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "2", "4", or "6", "probability variation 1" of the first special symbol ~ The probability of being a jackpot pattern corresponding to "probability variation 6" is low. In addition, when it is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "1" or "5", the degree of expectation that is a big hit symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol is "2". , “4”, or “6” is displayed in a stopped state as the combination mode, and is lower than in the case of being displayed in a stopped state as the combination mode of “3”. However, as the combination mode of the decorative patterns in the normal mode, the combination modes other than the combination mode of “7” may be stopped and displayed. As described above, the second special symbol is being hit from the normal mode, when the SP bonus is transferred, the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbols, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. It is decided that it is a jackpot pattern corresponding to "probability variation 1".

The normal stage and the special stage of the normal mode are the production stages that are the factors that determine the production mode in the uncertain variation and non-time saving game state, and the result of the jackpot determination is the predetermined result, the special symbol game is the predetermined number of times. When the digestion is completed, or transition conditions such as the passage of a predetermined time set in advance are satisfied, the transitions are made to each other. The decorative pattern image data, the background image data, the frequency of effects, the appearance rate of specific effects, and the like can be made different between the normal stage and the special stage. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game of the player who is playing the game in the normal mode.

The time saving mode is a production mode in which an uncertain change and a time saving game state are performed. The time saving mode corresponds to the big hit symbols of "time saving 1" to "time saving 5" when the big hit symbols corresponding to "time saving 1" to "time saving 5" of the first special symbol are stopped and displayed in the normal game state. It is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot design of "hour saving 1" and "hour saving 5", 100 times as the number of games is given until the special symbol game is basically exhausted 100 times. Continued. Also, after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbols of "hour saving 2" to "hour saving 4" is completed, by being given 4 times as the number of games, basically until 4 special symbol games are consumed. Continued. Further, even if the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol or the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is finally a non-V prize. When the time is shortened, the mode is shifted to the time saving mode of 100 times as in the case of "time saving 1" and "time saving 5". In this way, the time saving mode is executed after the end of the big hit game state when the non-V prize is finally won in the big hit game state.

In the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of "7", the effect mode shifts to the SP bonus which is the second special symbol hitting. In the time saving mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbol "7" is a big hit symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. However, in the time saving mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols "1" to "6" may be stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. Further, in the time saving mode, when the special symbol game of 4 times or 100 times given as the number of games is exhausted without the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the time saving mode, based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, a bonus other than the SP bonus (first special symbol hitting , A live bonus, a story bonus, or a battle bonus). In this case, a combination mode other than "7" is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot pattern corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol. Is shown.

The short mode of the time saving mode is executed as a staging mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be given is four, and even when the number of games is 100, up to the beginning of the fourth Is to be executed. The long mode of the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that impresses when the number of games to be given reaches 100 times, and when the number of times of games becomes the fourth time or more after the start of the time saving mode, the short mode is performed. There is a case where it is executed with an effect mode that gives an impression of promotion.

The ST mode is a production mode of a probability variation and a time-saving game state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the game state to the probability variation game state (ST game state) after the jackpot game state which finally became the V prize. Is done. The ST mode is continuously given until the special symbol game is exhausted 180 times by being given 180 times as the number of games, for example.

In the ST mode, even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of “7”, similarly to the case of the time saving mode, the second special symbol is being hit, and the SP bonus is shifted. However, even in the ST mode, as a big hit symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the combination pattern of decorative symbols "1" to "6" may be stopped and displayed, and the time saving mode and the ST mode Thus, the combination mode of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state may be different. For example, in one mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbol "7" is made to correspond to the big hit symbol corresponding to the "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, and in the other mode, the decorative symbol is "1". ~ It is good also as making the combination mode of "7" correspond to the big hit symbol corresponding to "probability variation 1" of the 2nd special symbol. Even in the ST mode, if the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (first special symbol per hit) In some cases, it may shift to a live bonus, story bonus, or battle bonus). In this case, a combination mode other than "7" is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of the decorative symbols, and a big hit pattern corresponding to "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" or "time reduction 1" to "time reduction 5" of the first special symbol. Is shown.

The story section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the big hit game state when the V prize is finally won in the big hit game state, and basically 51 special symbol games are consumed. Will continue until. In this story section, a series of story productions is executed over a total of 10 sets, with the number of games being 5 times as one set. The remaining number of games, that is, one time, is used at the beginning of the series of story effects to be executed to execute effects (for example, title display) at the time of introduction of the series of stories. It should be noted that the series of story effects executed in this story section is such that the story progresses even within the 50 games, and the story also advances each time it is executed in the series of story effect units. A series of story production progresses when the big hit game state is so-called "resort" in the ST mode.

The battle reach section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the story section of the ST mode, and basically continues until the end of the ST mode. In this battle reach section, an effect of displaying a battle scene of one character (for example, an ally character) and another character (for example, an enemy character) is executed, and it is determined that the reach is performed as the effect content. Then, a battle effect between the one character and the other character is executed, and the result of the jackpot determination is notified by displaying the win/loss. In addition, in this battle reach section, if it is decided to perform the reach as the effect content, the battle effect will be performed regardless of the result of the big hit judgment (winning), but in the story section, the effect content is Even if it is decided to perform the reach as described above, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the progress of the story is prioritized and no particular notification is given. As described above, in the ST mode, the story section and the battle reach section are provided, so that different notifications are made to improve the enjoyment of the game of the player.

Note that the variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) to be referred to may be different between the ST mode story section and the battle reach section. That is, in the ST mode (ST game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined with different selection probabilities according to the effect mode (story section and battle reach section). Specifically, in the ST mode story section, a variation pattern (for example, shortened variation) associated with a short variation time (for example, 2 s) has a high probability so that the progress of a series of story effects is prioritized. The variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) selected in step 1 is referred to, and in the ST mode battle reach section, a variation pattern associated with a relatively long variation time (eg, 6 s) (eg, normal) The fluctuation pattern determination table (main fluctuation time determination table) in which (variation) is selected with high probability may be referred to. In the story section of ST mode, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) having different variation pattern selection probabilities depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game may be further referred to, and the ST mode battle may be performed. In the reach section, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) having different variation pattern selection probabilities depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game may be further referred to.

The live bonus in the first special symbol hit, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, hit patterns 1 and 2 (real 9R), hit pattern 3 (real 5R), hit pattern 7 (real 8R), and hit pattern 8 It is an effect mode that is executed in association with the big hit game state corresponding to (substantially 4R), and is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression of these big hit game states. In this live bonus, a predetermined song (one of song patterns A to C) corresponding to the type of a more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46) is selected and is output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c. Is output. Further, in conjunction with the output of the selected predetermined music, the effect in the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 and the effect in the light emission mode of the lamp/LED 27 are executed. In the live bonus, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is a hit pattern 1 to 3 in the final stage of the effect mode, it is informed that the specific second round game is executed, and the hit pattern 7 Or, if it is 8, it is informed that the specific second round game is not executed.

During the first special symbol hit, it indicates that it is a jackpot gaming state related to the first special symbol, depending on the type of hit pattern (big hit symbol), live bonus, story bonus, and battle bonus production mode There is. During the first special symbol hit, it is executed when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. Although not shown in FIG. 49, it is also executed when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or the ST mode. After the end of the first special symbol hit, if it is a V winning in the big hit game state, it shifts to the ST mode, and if it is a non-V winning, it shifts to the time saving mode.

The story bonus during the first special symbol hit, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 4 (real 5R) and the hit pattern 9 (real 4R) This is an effect mode that is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot gaming states. In this story bonus, a predetermined story effect according to the type of the hit pattern (may be a story effect related to a series of story effects executed in the above-mentioned story section, or may be an unrelated story effect) Is selected and executed by the performance executing means. In the story bonus, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 4 in the final stage of the effect mode, it is informed that the specific second round game is executed, and it is the hit pattern 9. In that case, it is informed that the specific second round game is not executed.

The battle bonus during the first special symbol hit, the big hit symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit patterns 5 and 6 (actual 5R), and the hit patterns 10 and 11 (actual 0R) to the big hit game state. It is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with each other and is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression of these jackpot gaming states. In this battle bonus, a predetermined battle effect according to the type of the hit pattern (may be a battle effect related to the battle effect executed in the above-mentioned battle reach section, or may not be a related battle effect) It is selected and executed by the performance executing means. In the battle bonus, in the middle stage of the effect mode, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the hit pattern 5 or 6, the specific second round game is executed and the first round game is executed. If it is hit pattern 10 or 11, it is informed that the specific second round game and the first round game are not executed.

During the second special symbol hit, it indicates that it is a big hit game state related to the second special symbol, the type of the hit pattern (big hit symbol) (in the present embodiment, there is one kind of hit pattern 12, but (Not limited to this), there is an SP bonus effect mode. During the second special symbol hit, is executed when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode or the ST mode. Further, as described above, it may be executed even when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. After the end of the second special symbol hit, because it is basically easy V winning in all big hit game state, it shifts to the ST mode. Although not shown in FIG. 49, if there is a non-V prize in the big hit game state, the mode is shifted to the time saving mode.

The SP bonus during the second special symbol hit, the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is executed in association with the big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 12 (substantially 16R), and impresses this big hit game state. It is an effect mode executed as an effect mode. In this SP bonus, basically, the specific second round game is executed, and it is informed that the first round game is executed the largest number of times as compared with other jackpot game states. In the SP bonus, when the second special symbol hits in the time saving mode, the SP bonus hit effect pattern in which an effect mode that gives an impression of promotion from the time saving mode to the ST mode is executed is determined, and the ST mode. If the second special symbol hits in the story section, the related story hit production pattern for SP bonus in which the effect mode that gives the impression of "rensou" in ST mode is executed is determined, and the battle reach section in ST mode In the case where the second special symbol hit occurs, the SP bonus battle hit effect pattern in which the effect mode that gives an impression of pulling back the big hit in the ST mode is executed is determined.

It should be noted that, even if not illustrated and described, it is possible to shift between the effect modes with the transition of the game state, and the present invention is not limited to the range illustrated and described.

[Specifications of game machines]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the special symbol is 1/297.89 (220/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variation game state), and when the probability is high (probability variation game state). ) Is 1/122.96 (533/65536). The digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested by prioritizing the lottery by the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times as the number of games (variation number of special symbols) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. In other words, in the first special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 1", the big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the hit pattern 1 and the round number of the round game is 16R (of which the actual round number that is easy to win in the big winning opening is 9R) is given, a live bonus is executed as a big hit game state effect mode, and the effect content is “live bonus 9R success”. The probability (rush rate) to be "probability variation 1" as a big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 46/200 (hit patterns 1-1 to 46).

In the big winning symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 2, the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 9R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the "live bonus 9R" as the effect content. "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.
In the big winning symbol "probability variation 3" of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 3, a round number 16R (of which the actual round number 5R) is given, a live bonus is executed as an effect mode, and "live bonus 5R" as an effect content. "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the first special symbol is set to 18/200 (per hit patterns 3-1 to 18).

In the first special symbol big hit symbol "probability variation 4", the hit pattern is 4, a round number 16R (of which the actual round number 5R) is given, a story bonus is executed as an effect mode, and a story content is "Story Bonus 5R". "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol “probability variation 4” of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 4-1 to 17).

In the big winning symbol "probability variation 5" of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 5, the round number 16R (of which the actual round number 5R) is given, the battle bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the "battle bonus 5R" is the effect content. "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/200 (per pattern 5-1 to 20).

In the big winning symbol "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 6, a round number 16R (of which the actual round number 5R) is given, a battle bonus is executed as an effect mode, and "battle bonus 5R" as an effect content. "Success". The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol is set to 2/200 (hit patterns 6-1, 2).

In the big-hit symbol "time saving 1" of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 7, the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 8R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the "live bonus 8R" as the effect content. "Failure." The inrush rate of the big-hit symbol "time saving 1" of the first special symbol is set to 16/200 (per hit patterns 7-1 to 16).

In the big-hit symbol "time saving 2" of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 8, the round number 16R (of which the actual round number 4R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the "live bonus 4R" as the effect content. "Failure." The inrush rate of the big hit symbol “time saving 2” of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (per hit patterns 8-1 to 17).

In the big-hit symbol “Time saving 3” of the first special symbol, the winning pattern is 9, the round number 16R (of which the actual round number 4R) is given, the story bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the story content is “Story bonus 4R”. "Failure." The inrush rate of the big-hit symbol "time saving 3" of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (per hit patterns 9-1 to 17).

In the big-hit symbol "hour-short 4" or "hour-short 5" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern becomes 10 or 11, the round number 16R (of which the actual round number 0R) is given, and the battle bonus is executed as the production mode The content is "Battle bonus 0R failure". The inrush rate of the big-hit symbol “time saving 4” or “time saving 5” of the first special symbol is set to 23/200 (per hit pattern 10-1 to 23, or hit pattern 11-1 to 23).

In the big winning symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol, the winning pattern is 12, the round number 16R (of which the actual round number 16R) is given, the SP bonus is executed as the effect mode, and the "SP bonus 16R" as the effect content. It has become. The inrush rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is set to 1/1 (that is, 100%).

The special winning opening count number is set so as to count up to 9 for each of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 as the upper limit number of winnings per round. As time-saving performance (specification of time-saving game state), during high probability (while in the probability variation game state), or in the non-probability variation game state, the time-saving game state is set to continue up to 100 times or four times. .. The number of prize balls is 3 per winning prize in the first starting opening 32, 1 per winning prize in the second starting opening 33, and 1 winning prize in the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. The number is set to 10 per coin, and 14 per prize to the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37).

Normally, the winning probability of the symbol is set to 0 when the probability is low and 1/1 when the probability is high. The number of normal symbols is set to one.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening/closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 51, a plurality of opening/closing patterns A to C are defined as the opening/closing pattern for one round in the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 (one round opening/closing pattern). The first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are simply referred to as special winning openings unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The open/close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 51 are merely examples, and the specific time and the like for defining the open/close pattern may be other than those shown.

The opening/closing pattern A is an opening/closing pattern in which the open state continues for 27.222 s. In the opening/closing pattern A, a period from the first open state to the final closed state is defined as a round section. The round section is similarly defined in other opening/closing patterns as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. In the section where the open state is 27.222 s, the open state of the special winning opening is a long open which is relatively long. That is, the opening/closing pattern A has one long opening, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern A is 27.222 s.

The open/close pattern B is an open/close pattern in which the open state is first for 0.102 s, the closed state is for 2.898 s, and then the open state continues for 27.222 s. In the section in which the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the special winning opening is a short open in which the open state is relatively short. That is, in the opening/closing pattern B, the short opening occurs once, the closed state goes through once, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern B becomes 27.324 s. In addition, in the open state where the short opening is made, it becomes extremely difficult to win the game ball to the big winning opening, while in the open state where the long opening is made, it is possible and easy to win the game ball to the big winning opening. ing. Such short circuit opening is also the same in the opening/closing pattern C described later.

The open/close pattern C is an open/close pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the open/close pattern C is one in which a short circuit is opened only once, and the total open time of the open/close pattern C is 0.102 s.

In this way, the actual round game in the big hit game state corresponds to the round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing pattern A or B described above. Then, the round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing pattern C is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the actual round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open/closed state of the second special winning opening 37. As shown in FIG. 52, as a general rule, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is that the operation period for opening the specific area 38A is 0.102 s, and then the specific area 38A is closed. Is defined as an operating pattern in which the operating period continues for a maximum of 29.222 s after that. The total actuation time of the displacement member actuation pattern is 32.222 s. During the operation period of 0.102 s, the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short, so that it is extremely difficult to make a V win in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 29.222 s at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that V winning in the specific area 38A is relatively easy. For the maximum operation period of 29.222 s, the second special winning opening 37 is closed in one round when the second special winning opening 37 is in the open/closed state, for example, when the special winning opening count reaches the upper limit winning number. When a predetermined monitoring processing time regarding a residual ball, which will be described later, has elapsed, the displacing member 39 becomes inactive and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum length of 29.222 s has elapsed. May be.

[Prize winning opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53, as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern), a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 12 are defined. In the winning patterns 1 and 2, the number of rounds (hereinafter referred to as the “specified number of rounds”) that occurs during the live bonus (success in the live bonus 9R) and is generally in the open state is 16R, and the big winning opening It is a winning pattern in which the actual number of rounds that allows winning a prize is defined as 9R. In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval where the special winning opening is closed until the first opening of the special winning opening in the next round after the final closing of the special winning opening in one round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the inter-round interval, an interval pattern a in which the closed state time (closed time) is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which it is 102 ms are defined. In the hit patterns 1 and 2, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 opens/closes at the 1st to 8th rounds. It is defined to be pattern A. That is, in the hit patterns 1 and 2, the actual round number is 9 rounds of the first to eighth rounds and the tenth round, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs during a live bonus (successful live bonus 5R), and the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is defined as 5R. In the hit pattern 3, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second special winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first special winning opening 36 opens/closes the pattern A at the first to fourth rounds. It is prescribed to be. That is, in the hit pattern 3, the actual number of rounds is 5 rounds of the first to fourth rounds and the tenth round, and only the tenth round is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs when a story bonus (story bonus 5R success) occurs, and the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is defined as 5R. In the hit pattern 4, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second special winning opening 37 is the opening/closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first special winning opening 36 is the opening/closing pattern A at the first to fourth rounds. It is prescribed to be. That is, in the hit pattern 4, the actual round number is 5 rounds of the 1st to 4th rounds and the 10th round, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit patterns 5 and 6 are hit patterns that are generated at the time of a battle bonus (successful battle bonus 5R), and the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the hit patterns 5 and 6, the inter-round intervals between the 1st R to 10R are the interval pattern a, the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern b, and the 10th R is the second special winning opening 37. The opening/closing pattern B is set, and the first special winning opening 36 is set to be the opening/closing pattern A on the 11th to 14th eyes. In other words, the winning patterns 5 and 6 are the five rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 10th to 14th rounds, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern that occurs when a live bonus (live bonus 8R failure) occurs, and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 8R. In the hit pattern 7, all the round intervals are the interval pattern b, and the first special winning opening 36 is defined as the opening/closing pattern A in the first to eighth rounds. In other words, the winning pattern 7 is 8 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is 1R to 8R, and the round in which the V prize is easily won in the specific area 38A is not executed.

The hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern that occurs during a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), and the specified round number is 16R and the actual round number is defined as 4R. In the winning pattern 8, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first special winning opening 36 is defined as the opening/closing pattern A in the first to fourth rounds. That is, the winning pattern 8 is four rounds in which the actual round number is the first round to the fourth round, and the round in which the V prize is easily won in the specific area 38A is not executed.

The hit pattern 9 is a hit pattern that is generated in the story bonus (story bonus 4R failure), and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is specified as 4R. In the winning pattern 9, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, and the first special winning opening 36 is defined as the opening/closing pattern A in the first to fourth rounds. That is, the winning pattern 9 is four rounds in which the actual number of rounds is 1R to 4R, and the round in which the V prize is easily won in the specific area 38A is not executed.

The hit patterns 10 and 11 are hit patterns that are generated at the time of a battle bonus (battle bonus 0R failure), and the specified round number is 16R and the actual round number is defined as 0R. In the hit patterns 10 and 11, the inter-round intervals between the first to tenth rounds are the interval pattern a, and the other inter-round intervals are the interval pattern b. The special winning opening 36 is defined to have an opening/closing pattern C. That is, in the hit patterns 10 and 11, the actual number of rounds is 0R, and the round in which the V prize is easily won in the specific area 38A is not executed.

The hit pattern 12 is a hit pattern that occurs in the SP bonus (live bonus 16R), and the specified round number is 16R and the actual round number is 16R. In the hit pattern 12, all the intervals between rounds are the interval pattern b, the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening/closing pattern B at the 10th R, and the first big winning opening at the 1R to 9R and 11 to 16R. 36 is defined as the opening/closing pattern A. In other words, the winning pattern 12 is 16 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the same as the specified number of rounds, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

In addition, in the winning patterns 1 to 6 and 12, a round (specific second round game) in which it is easy to win V in the specific area 38A is executed only in the 10th round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, , The specific second round game may be executed in the other rounds (1st to 9th eyes, 11th to 16th eyes). In addition, in these hit patterns, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed. In addition, in each of the above-described hit patterns including these hit patterns, the second special winning opening 37 is opened, but it is difficult to win a V prize in the specific area 38A (normal second round game). May be Also, in FIG. 53, as the inter-round interval, a part where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b, or a part where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a. That is, various transformations according to production modes in the big hit game state production mode (first special symbol hitting, live bonus, story bonus, battle bonus, or second special symbol hitting, SP bonus) It can be performed.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. In addition, the table defines lottery value (random number) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random number) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. The value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”.

<Sub effect content determination table>
54 and 55 are diagrams showing a part of the sub effect content determination table. The sub effect content determination table is a table that is referred to in an effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 83 described later) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later, and a jackpot determination for each effect mode (or for each gaming state). Results (wins/losses), current game state (non-probability variation/non-time saving, non-probability variation/time saving, probability variation/time saving), type of variation pattern designation command, various random range for sub-effect selection (lottery value), etc. The type (sub-effect content) of the effect pattern to be determined is defined according to the parameter. The sub effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 is a sub effect content determination table for explaining the item prefetch effect (see FIGS. 43 to 48 and FIGS. 111 to 113 described later) in the present embodiment. A part of the specified item prefetching effect is excerpted and shown, and the effect contents of the item prefetching effect and other effect contents are not limited to this. The item prefetching effect is an effect for notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is determined that a big hit is determined by displaying an item (for example, plates A to D described later).

In the sub effect content determination tables shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the effect patterns of the item prefetch effects 1 to 24, which are the item effect contents, are defined, and 1 based on each selection probability (sub effect selection random number range). The production pattern of is decided. Further, in the item prefetch effects 1 to 24 that are the contents of the item effects, the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D are defined as a plurality of items, and the number (number of plates) of each plate is specified. ing. Although not shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the item prefetch effects 1 to 24, which are the contents of the item effects, include pseudo-effect effects that will be described later as a plurality of expectation types, dialogue effects that will be described later, and later effects. The cut-in effect and other promotion (reversal) effects which will be described later are defined, and the respective expectations (stages at which the expectations are high or low) are also specified. Here, the plate A corresponds to the pseudo continuous effect as an expectation type, the plate B corresponds to the dialogue effect as an expectation type, and the plate C corresponds to the cut-in effect as an expectation type. The plate D corresponds to other promotion (reverse) effects as an expectation type. Expectation level types are effects themselves that notify different types of expectations in individual effects that form part of item prefetching effects (more specifically, effects that are executed in the item use effect process described below). The level of expectation indicates the degree of expectation, and by combining these expectations, it is possible to determine whether or not it is determined that the item pre-reading effect as a whole will be a big hit.

<Hit production pattern determination table>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table. The hit effect pattern determination table is a table that is referred to in a hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 91 described later) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. The hit effect pattern is determined for each type of hit pattern in accordance with the lottery value. The type of pattern is specified. The hit effect pattern determination table defines, as the types of hit effect patterns, music patterns A to C that form a live bonus, story patterns D and E that form a story bonus, and battle patterns F and G that form a battle bonus. ing. The lottery value defines lottery value information when the random number range is 32768, and the lottery rate when the lottery value is 32768 is 32768/32768, that is, 100%. However, the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is an example, and the defined lottery value information (lottery ratio) is not limited to this.

The music pattern A further includes a music pattern A (success) that constitutes a live bonus 9R success, a music pattern A (reverse) that constitutes a live bonus 5R success, a music pattern that constitutes a live bonus 8R failure and a live bonus 4R failure. There is a hit production pattern of A (failure). That is, when the musical composition pattern A (success) or the musical composition pattern A (reverse rotation) is determined as the winning effect pattern, basically, it is determined that the ST mode (special gaming state) is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. .. On the other hand, when the musical composition pattern A (failure) is determined as the hit production pattern, basically, it is decided that the ST mode is not shifted to after the end of the big hit game state, but the time reduction mode is shifted.

The music pattern B further includes a music pattern B (success) that constitutes a live bonus 9R success, a music pattern B (reverse) that constitutes a live bonus 5R success, a music pattern that constitutes a live bonus 8R failure and a live bonus 4R failure. There is a hit production pattern of B (failure). That is, when the musical composition pattern B (success) or the musical composition pattern B (reverse rotation) is determined as the hit production pattern, it is basically determined that the ST mode (special gaming state) is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. .. On the other hand, when the musical composition pattern B (failure) is determined as the hit production pattern, basically, it is determined that the ST mode is not shifted to after the end of the big-hit gaming state, but the time-saving mode is shifted.

The musical composition pattern C is one type of the musical composition pattern C (determined), and when the musical composition pattern C (determined) is determined as the winning effect pattern, basically, the ST mode (special gaming state after the end of the big hit game state) ) Is confirmed. Each of the music patterns A to C is a music pattern in which different music is output, and the degree of expectation that the transition to the ST mode (special game state) is determined depends on the type of the output music. Has become.

The music pattern A (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-1 to 8 (that is, eight hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is hit patterns 7-1 to 12 (that is, 12 hit patterns). Hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game of 1R (10R) is executed after the first round game of 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, and the hit pattern 7 is , Is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game of 8R minutes (1 to 8R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is 8/20 when the first round game of 8R (1 to 8R) is executed. %.

Further, the music pattern A (reverse rotation) is associated with the hit patterns 3-1 to 6 (that is, six hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is hit patterns 8-1 to 9 (that is, 9 hit patterns). The hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game of 1R (10R) is executed after the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, and the hit pattern 8 is It is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed. That is, when the musical composition pattern A is determined, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game when the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed is 6/15 and is 40. %.

The music pattern B (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-9 to 14 (that is, 6 hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failure) is the hit patterns 7-1 3 to 16 (that is, 4 hit patterns). Hit pattern). That is, when the musical composition pattern B is determined, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is 6/10 when the first round game of 8R (1 to 8R) is executed. %.

Further, the music pattern B (reverse) is associated with the hit patterns 3-7 to 18 (that is, 12 hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failure) is the hit patterns 8-10 to 17 (that is, 8 hit patterns). The hit pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game when the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed is 12/20 and is 60. %.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the music pattern B is selected, rather than the degree of expectation (40%) at which the specific second round game is executed when the music pattern A is selected, It is configured such that the degree of expectation (60%) for executing the two-round game is higher. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation between songs can be changed, and the player's expectation in the live bonus (specific gaming state) can be further enhanced.

Note that, for example, in the music pattern A, when the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (that is, the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 8 is When the determination is made, 8R minutes (1 is higher than the degree of expectation that the music pattern A (reverse) is selected when either the music pattern A (reverse) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected). ~8R) When the first round game is executed, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed (that is, when the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 7 is determined, the music pattern A (success)) Alternatively, the music pattern A (success), which is occupied when any one of the music patterns B (failure) is selected, may be configured to be higher.

Specifically, the music pattern A (reverse) is associated with the hit pattern 3 (that is, 18 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is associated with the hit pattern 8 (that is, 17 hit patterns). The music pattern A (success) may be associated with the hit pattern 1 (that is, 46 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) may be associated with the hit pattern 7 (that is, 16 hit patterns). In this case, when either the music pattern A (reverse) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 18+17=35/200), the degree of expectation that the music pattern A (reverse) is selected (for example, 18/35), when either the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 46+16=62/200), the music pattern A (success) is expected to be selected. The degree (eg, 46/62) can be higher. With this configuration, the second common portion of the music pattern A (for example, the B melody of the second section described later) is output after the elapse of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section described later). And, since the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed is relatively high, it is possible to diversify the role of a predetermined branch period (for example, a first branch section described later), and a big hit game state ( The expectation of the player in the specific game state) can be further enhanced.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76.

[Main processing by main CPU]
57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 57, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input/output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power failure is detected. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). When the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is in the power failure detection state, and the process proceeds to S12. When the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the process is performed in S13. Transfer.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when determining that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 58), and when determining that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, proceeds to S16. Transfer processing.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S17 when determining that there is the power failure detection flag, and shifts the processing to S30 (see FIG. 58) when determining that the power failure detection flag does not exist. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a work area damage check and a process of calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when determining that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19, and when determining that the work damage check value is not a normal value, shifts the process to S30. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display for informing that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. It should be noted that the notification display may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the game state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the processing is shifted to S24, and the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

As shown in FIG. 57, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting 8000H in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs an all work area clear process. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs a process of initializing the work area when the RAM is initialized. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 executes an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs an initial value random number updating process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this processing, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and when the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, moves the processing to S42 and sets the system timer monitoring timer value to 3 If not, the process proceeds to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 synchronizes the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70 with a waiting time timer and a special winning opening for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening that is opened when a big hit occurs. Various types of timers such as an open time timer and a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that a fraudulent activity has been detected. Execute the process to update the timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value in accordance with the detection signals from the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330. Then, the jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 is referred to, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (lottery for jackpot) is won, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to make a lost symbol or a hit symbol based on the hit probability of the normal symbol (see FIG. 50) in accordance with the detection signal from the passage gate switch 350, and makes a determination. Perform the process of storing the result. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination showing the winning symbol is stored, and in the case of the non-winning, the result of the determination showing the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the hit pattern is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, or four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds. To do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is designed to be opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to enter the second starting opening 33. The main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determining random number value and a normal symbol determining random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the passage gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determining random number value and the main ROM 62. Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won, and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 (illustrated It is also possible to determine which of the lost design and the hit design based on When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45, and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process of storing in. The main CPU 61 sends a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 based on the received control signal in a variable display and a stop display. Further, the normal symbol display portion 51 of the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of generating data regarding a game information signal to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol reserve number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 61) in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350 and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 63 through the above steps and the like from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and an LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first special winning opening shutter 36A, and the second big winning prize. The solenoid power supply for driving the solenoid for opening and closing the mouth shutter 37A and opening and closing the blade member 34 is supplied. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 executes a winning opening-related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main processing by the main CPU 61 in S38 to S50 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main processing and execute the timer interrupt processing even when the main processing is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes an interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 59, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described later in detail, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by 1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and sends a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 is removed from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output to. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters the system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is uncertain, the hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter will lack fairness, so to ensure this, the fixed timing every 2 ms. I am trying to update at. When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described later in detail, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to be winning. The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 wins the game balls at the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. It is checked whether or not there is a prize, and if there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout/firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is “1 (ON)” from the payout device 83 in association with the winning of the game ball, and the set command. Is transmitted to the payout/launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command setting is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs a command transmission control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register restoration process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this timer interrupt process routine ends.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the timer updating process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer updating process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 60, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. When this process ends, the process moves to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first big winning opening 36 to the first big winning opening count switch 360, and a ball passage from the second big winning opening 37 to the second big winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the remaining sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining spheres remaining in. In this processing, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S77, and if it determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is not "0". , S73. In addition, when the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0" and the round game is not in progress, when the special winning opening count switch detects a game ball, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is not "0", it moves the process to S77, and if it determines that the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the specific area 38A is open. In this process, when determining that the specific area 38A is not open, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S77, and when determining that the specific area 38A is open, shifts the processing to S76.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data for closing the specific area 38A and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so that the specific area 38A is closed. When this process ends, the process moves to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is “0” after the second special winning opening 37 has finished the long opening (the open state is the section of 27.222 s) and is in the closed state. Then, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific area 38A becomes a closed state after an open state of about 28.320s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls that are won and discharged in the second special winning opening 37. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", it moves the process to S80, and if it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", S78. Transfer processing to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set for the remaining ball monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be the same value or a large value (longer time).

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the timer update processing routine, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening counter is "10". The special winning opening opening number counter is a counter used for identifying the 10Rth opening and closing of the second special winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the special winning opening opening counter does not count the number of times the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are actually opened, and is incremented by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not "10", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S82 and determines that the value of the special opening opening counter is "10". If so, the process proceeds to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the special winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag has the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 61 ends the timer update processing routine, and the control state flag indicates the special winning opening opening process. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the value of the second special winning opening prize counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The second special winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second special winning opening 37 detected by the second special winning opening counting switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second special winning opening prize counter and the value of the discharge ball counter are the same. In this processing, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer updating processing routine, and the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is changed. If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370 until it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Equivalent to time. Therefore, when it is determined in this process that the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, a ball clogging inside the second special winning opening 37 or a second big due to a so-called goto action is performed. It is assumed that only the winning a prize count switch 370 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the sheet has not been ejected normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second special winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the ejection error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends. The ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 61, in S90, the main CPU 61 conducts fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) that can detect radio waves, a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S91. If any of the above-mentioned sensors is in a detected state, error notification may be given, and at that time, even if the special winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalid. You may do so.

In S91, the main CPU 61 conducts special symbol-related switch check processing. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the passage gate switch 350 has been input, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and if it is determined that the input has been made, the number of reserves is the upper limit (for example, (4 pieces), and if it is determined to be the upper limit, this processing ends. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, processing for outputting a detection signal is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball-related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting opening switch 320, and the second starting opening switch 330 have been input. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B is input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first starting opening switch 320 or the second starting is performed. When it is determined that the mouth switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start mouth prize counter is performed. When this process ends, this switch input process routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing special symbol-related switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 62, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first starting opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second starting opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first special winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second special winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66. When this process ends, this special symbol related switch check process routine ends.

[First start switch check process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The first starting opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 63, in S110, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320. To do. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first starting opening is determined. When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the processing is moved to S111, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting opening The switch check processing routine ends.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first starting opening switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the random number for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for determination of hit by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the random number value for symbol determination from the random number counter for symbol determination. A process for extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol starting storage area is from the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, various obtained by the game ball winning the first starting opening 32 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for winning determination and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Like The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed as an effect when it is determined that the winning effect is achieved in the process of S115. As a result, a so-called “pre-reading effect”, such as performing an effect based on the starting memory before the variation execution, becomes possible. When this process ends, the first starting opening switch check process routine ends.

[Second starting opening switch check processing]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The second starting opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 64, in S120, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330. To do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening is determined. When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the processing is moved to S121. When the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting opening The switch check processing routine ends.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. When it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second starting opening switch check processing routine is ended, and when it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the random number for hit determination of the special symbol game from the random number counter for determination of hit by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the random number value for symbol determination from the random number counter for symbol determination. A process for extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol starting storage area, there is a second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, various obtained by the game ball winning the second starting opening 33 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number value of is sequentially stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second starting opening switch check process routine ends.

[First prize winning switch check processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. The first special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 65, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first special winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first special winning opening count switch 360. Perform processing to In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S131, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 36. When it is determined that it is not performed, this first special winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first special winning opening prize counter. The first big winning award winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process ends, the process moves to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub controlling circuit 70, so that the sub controlling circuit 70 wins a game ball to the first special winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process ends, the first special winning opening switch check process routine ends.

[Second prize winning switch check processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the second special winning opening switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This second special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 66, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second special winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second special winning opening count switch 370. Perform processing to In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S141, and detects the winning of the game ball into the second special winning opening 37. If it is determined that it is not performed, the process proceeds to S143.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second special winning opening winning counter. The second special winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process ends, the process moves to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 sets the second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub controlling circuit 70, so that the sub controlling circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second special winning opening 37. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected, based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S144, and determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process proceeds to S152.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening counter is "10". The special winning opening opening counter is as described above. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not "10", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S152 and determines that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is "10". If so, the process proceeds to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value indicating the special winning opening opening process (04H), the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149, and the control state flag is the value indicating the special winning opening opening process (04H). If it is determined not to be), the process proceeds to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening restart pre-release waiting time management process or a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. I do. When determining that the control state flag is “05H” or “06H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S148, and when determining that the control state flag is neither “05H” nor “06H”. Moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this processing, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than “0”. Then, the process proceeds to S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than “0”, it is determined that an illegal prize has been generated, and an error command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may do so.

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”. The specific area passage flag is an internal flag which is set to "01H" when the specific area switch 380A detects a V winning of a game ball. In this processing, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S152, and if it determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is not “01H”. , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is determined after the jackpot gaming state ends. When this process ends, the process moves to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a specific area passing command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. When this process ends, the process moves to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when determining that passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S153, and determines that passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In this case, the process proceeds to S154.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second special winning opening prize counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only in the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this second special winning opening switch check processing routine, and the second special winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command is as described above. When this process ends, the process moves to S156.

In S156, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second special winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the ejection error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the second special winning opening switch check process routine ends. The ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. In FIG. 67, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control status flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control status flag in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S161.

In S161 to S168 described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S161 to S168. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the process in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61, the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set as the control state flag. After setting, the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the processing of S163 after the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit when the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed. In the case of a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, the process of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the first big winning prize read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 58, the main CPU 61 causes the main CPU 61 to store the data and the displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. The data for opening is read, and control signals based on these data are supplied to the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time before opening the special winning opening and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval pattern a, b) has elapsed, The special winning opening opening counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.222 s of the opening/closing pattern A) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening/closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37 when either condition is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the special winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the maximum opening opening maximum value (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the case of the final round, while a value (05H) indicating the waiting time before the special winning opening reopening in the case of not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game ending process. In this process, the main CPU 61, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, 1 indicating the end of one game from the external terminal board 80). A process for outputting a game end signal or a big hit signal indicating that the big hit game is in progress) is executed, and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the processing of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol control process routine ends.

As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to (00H), (01H), (02H), (07H) in order when the result of the hit determination is lost in the case of not being in the big hit game state. As a result, the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 67 is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit when the big hit gaming state is not set, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), and (02H), so that S161 shown in FIG. , S162, S163 are executed at a predetermined timing to start the jackpot gaming state. Further, in the case of the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag in the order of (03H), (04H), (05H), and thereby predetermined processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. 67. It will be executed at the timing of, and the jackpot gaming state will be executed. In addition, when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied, by setting in sequence (04H), (06H), (07H), the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 67 is executed at a predetermined timing. Then, the big hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 68, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check. When determining that the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S171. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory is stored. In this process, the main CPU61, when it is determined that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) or the second special symbol starting storage If the data is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs demo display processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the starting memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol starting storage region or the second special symbol starting storage region in which the random number for hit determination is stored) has a state of "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If maintained, the demo display permission value is set to a value that permits execution of the demo display. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command thus stored is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demo display command. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence or absence of data in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), and the starting storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, that is, if it is determined that the data is not stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the process proceeds to S174. The start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, if it is determined that the data is stored in the second special symbol start memory region (0) to the second special symbol start memory region (4), S175. Transfer processing to.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, the main CPU 61, when the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is the first special symbol, each of the data of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is the first. The special symbol starting storage area (0) shifts (stores) from the first special symbol starting storage area (3) to the processing, and the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol starting storage area (1) from each of the data in the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the processing to shift (store) from the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3) To do. When this process ends, the process moves to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) for a big hit varies depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability variation game state with a small number is referred to. In this way, if the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, that is, if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state that is easy to shift to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the jackpot gaming state is set. The probability of transition is higher than the non-probability variation game state as the non-special game state in which it is more difficult to transition to the specific game state than the probability variation game state as the special game state.

Note that the special game state is a probability variation/time saving game state, and the non-special game state is basically a non-probability variation/non-time saving game state. However, in the present embodiment, the non-special game state is an uncertain variation game state and It also includes the case where the game is in a short-time gaming state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and for the hit determination of the special symbol starting storage area previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) and the second special symbol starting storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 33. The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting port 33.

Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the process moves to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and a process of determining a lose symbol in the case of a loss. The details of S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61, the special pattern determined in the process of S179, the result of the jackpot determination in the process of S178, and the value of the probability variation counter, the variation pattern for determining a different variation pattern Select a decision table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variable display mode of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. Note that this processing is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern thus stored is supplied to the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 will be variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the process moves to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for this variation display. When this process ends, the process moves to S182.

Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the variable display this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 69, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S198.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating variation of the first special symbol. In this processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S192 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the main CPU 61, if the variation state number is not a value (01H) indicating that it is a variation of the first special symbol, that is, the variation state number is a value (02H) indicating that it is a variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol, based on the random number for winning symbol determination. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the winning symbol determination random number and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol allocation of FIG. 50) Probability variation 1-probability variation 6, a process corresponding to any one of time saving 1 to time saving 5) is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of a big hit symbol of the determined first special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display portion 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S196.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61, based on the hit symbol determination random number and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol allocation of FIG. 50) A process of determining a symbol corresponding to probability variation 1) is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the jackpot symbol of the determined second special symbol and the command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display portion 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this processing, the main CPU 61, the special winning opening opening number related data regarding the opening number of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37, that is, probability variation 1 to probability variation 6, time saving 1 to time saving according to the first special symbol. 5, or the process of setting the data corresponding to the probability variation 1 by the second special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, this special symbol determination process routine ends.

On the other hand, in S198, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that it is not a big hit, that is, it is a loss, it executes a data set of a loss symbol and a command set of a loss symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54. The first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 variably displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this process ends, this special symbol determination process routine ends.

[Special symbol variable time management processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 70, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When determining that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. When it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting (storing) the symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the process moves to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the post-determination wait time in the area of the main RAM 63 that functions as a wait time timer. When this process ends, the special symbol variation time management process routine ends.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 71, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S221. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, if the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the processing to S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal game state (inaccurate change/non-time saving) in the game state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The hour/hour counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games in the hour/hour gaming state (the number of symbol variations). When the value of the hour/hour counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the hour/hour counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter is “0”. When the value of the hour/hour counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the hour/hour counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process ends, the process moves to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability variation end command indicating the end of the probability variation gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability variation end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability variation game state. Become. When this process ends, the process moves to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal game state (inaccurate change/non-time saving) in the game state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the ending process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S235. In the present embodiment, as an example, when the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol, the big hit symbol is "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 4", "time saving 1" to "time reduction 3" Is 10,000 ms, in the case of other big hit symbols it is 50,000 ms, and the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3000 ms when the big hit symbol is "probability variation 1".

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this processing, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit game state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the special winning opening opening counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

[Hit start interval management processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 72, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S241. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the special winning opening opening counter, and moves the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a special winning opening opening/closing pattern according to the type of big hit symbol, in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 53, which corresponds to the big hit symbol determined in S244. When this process ends, the process moves to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the special winning opening open display command becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in a predetermined region functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time is set as 27.222s when the time corresponding to the value of the special winning opening opening counter (the number of rounds), for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is "probability variation 1". When this process ends, the process moves to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way is to drive the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.

[Waiting management process before reopening the special winning opening]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a waiting time pre-opening question management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening re-opening waiting time question management processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 73, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag has the value (05H) indicating the waiting time before opening special winning opening management processing (05H), the processing proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 terminates the waiting time management processing routine before the special winning opening reopening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening pre-waiting waiting time management processing routine.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the special winning opening open display command becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening opening display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63, in the control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special winning opening reopening waiting time question management process routine ends.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This special winning opening opening process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 74, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening opening processing routine.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "9" or more. In this process, when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is “9” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S272. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274 when determining that the value of the special winning opening prize counter is not “10” or more.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the special winning opening opening/closing processing according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the processing to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is "0". When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening opening processing routine.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this way are for closing the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process ends, the process moves to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the remaining ball monitoring timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. When this process ends, the process moves to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed special winning opening is the second special winning opening 37. When determining that the closed special winning opening is the second special winning opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, when determining that the closed special winning opening is not the second special winning opening 37, that is, the first special winning opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. When this process ends, the process moves to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening number (round number). In this processing, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening number (round number) to determine the value of the special winning opening opening counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times of opening the special winning opening. Here, the upper limit of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is 16 times (16R). When determining that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is equal to or larger than the upper limit of the winning opening opening counter, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S282. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S279 when determining that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening number.

In S279, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time in the main RAM 63 based on the hit pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to the interval pattern a or b is set based on the hit pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 53). The inter-round interval display time may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b. When this process ends, the process moves to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The display command between rounds is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening opening process routine ends.

On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S283. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 20000 ms when the big hit symbol is "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", and "time saving 1" to " In the case of "time saving 5", it is 10000 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 20000 ms, if the jackpot in the non-probable variation game state, if the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1", the probability variation If it is a big hit in the gaming state, it is 5000 ms. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hit end interval display time at the end of the so-called first hit (the first big hit that triggers the transition from the non-probability-varied gaming state to the probability-varied gaming state) is the per-game (probability variation gaming state At the big hit that the probability variation game state continues, it is set to be longer than the hit end interval display time at the end.

In S283, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing in the control state flag in a predetermined area in the main RAM 63 that functions as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S284.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state. When this process ends, the special winning opening opening process routine ends.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 has a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing. When determining that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S291. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S297.

In S294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "02H" in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. "02H" of the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. When this process ends, the process moves to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63 to “180” as the ST number. When this process ends, the process moves to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “00H” in the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S299.

In S297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. "01H" of the gaming state flag indicates an uncertain variation gaming state and a time saving gaming state. When this process ends, the process moves to S298.

In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the hour/hour counter of the main RAM 63 to "4" or "100" as the hour/hour count. When this process ends, the process moves to S299. When "4" is set as the number of times saved, it is the case where the big hit symbol is "time saved 2" to "time saved 4" in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time saving game state, and the time saving game state in other situations. In the case of shifting to (1), "100" is set as the number of time saving.

In S299, the main CPU 61 sets the game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of the finished gaming state in addition to the information indicating the gaming state controlled after the end of the big-hit gaming state and the remaining number of times as a time saving number. The remaining number of time saving times is also referred to as the remaining number of time saving times as will be described later, and means the number of time saving times of "4" or "100" set in the process of S298. That is, the remaining number of time reductions (remaining time reductions) does not mean the number of time reductions remaining at any time in the time reduction mode, but merely indicates the number of time reductions remaining at the start of the time reduction mode. The game state command including information such as the remaining number of times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game ending process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 76, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process. When determining that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S301. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game ending process routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end time processing according to the opening/closing pattern for each set round in the type of big hit and the current round, and moves the processing to S302. In this special symbol game end process, the main CPU 61 executes a process for outputting a 1 game end signal or a big hit signal from the external terminal board 80 to the hall computer 100. In S302, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 93. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the sub CPU 71.
This main process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 77, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing when the power is turned on. When this process ends, the process moves to S311.

In S311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number value (random number counter value for effect determination, random number counter value for stop symbol determination, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs a display control process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits to the display control circuit 76 data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. The display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor), based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71, various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, and effect image data. The data is read from the ROM, superposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S314.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs a voice control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process ends, the process moves to S315.

In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling the light emission (lighting/blinking) of the lamp/LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process ends, the process moves to S316.

In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B. When this process ends, the process moves to S311 and the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated thereafter.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process and the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Command reception interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 78, and timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 78, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 80 and 81. When this process ends, the process moves to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt process routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 79, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding/subtracting) the value of the timer set for effect control. When this process ends, the process moves to S332.

In step S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been operated. That is, when the predetermined effect is performed and the effect content changes depending on whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated, the effect content is changed based on the determination result in this process. Will be controlled.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt process routine ends.

[Command analysis processing]
80 and 81 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 80, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command is received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

In step S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs the process according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392.

In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S394.

In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern designation command. When determining the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

As described above, the effect pattern may be determined based on the received variation pattern designating command or the received start winning command. Further, each information included in these commands may be comprehensively performed.

In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designating command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designating command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designating command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S396.

In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration pattern is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and these decorative patterns (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example, three (3 (Digits)) are arranged in the same decorative pattern (number), it is supposed to shift to the big hit game state. Further, the decorative pattern corresponding to the loss is a variegated pattern other than these, but among them, a specific number (for example, two) is stopped and displayed with the same decorative pattern (number) (becomes reach), and the rest (for example, 1). One that is stopped and displayed with different decorative patterns (numbers) is called reach lose eye. However, even in the case of a broken line, even when a specific broken line suggesting a specific meaning (for example, "753" meaning 753) is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state may be set. ..

In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S399. On the other hand, when determining that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S401.

In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91. When this process ends, the process moves to S400.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. The hit start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command is received as the command read in S391. When determining that the special winning opening winning command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening winning command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes prize ball counter addition processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71, depending on the number of gaming balls that have won the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37) Performs the process of counting the number of prize balls in all the big hit game states that have moved into the condominium and displaying the counted number of prize balls. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the specific area passing command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S404. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passage command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 carries out a process of setting the effect data indicating that the player has won the V prize in the big hit game state, that is, shifts to the ST mode after the end of the big hit game state. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S391. When determining that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, when determining that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting effect data according to the inter-round interval display time, for example. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends. In the hit effect pattern determination process described later with reference to FIG. 91, when a live bonus is determined as the hit effect pattern, and this live bonus is being executed, execution of the live bonus is prioritized and an interval display between rounds is performed. The effect data according to time is configured not to be set.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the special winning opening open display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S409. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the special winning opening open display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410 in FIG. 81.

In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes an in-round effect process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining number of possible prizes and the special winning opening opening time in the round. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S409 of FIG. 81, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode change processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71, if the received game state command is a command indicating a certainty variation/time saving game state, sets the value of the effect mode flag to "03H", and is a command indicating a non-certainty variation/time saving game state. Yes, if the remaining number of time saving times is 100 times, it is a command that sets "02H" to the value of the production mode flag and indicates an uncertain variation/time saving game state. If the remaining number of time saving times is 4 times , "01H" is set to the value of the effect mode flag, and if it is a command indicating other, a process of setting "00H" to the value of the effect mode flag is performed. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the time saving end command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S415.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes a time saving mode end process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easier to select an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation in the predetermined number of games after the end of the time saving mode. To do. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the probability variation end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S417.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes ST mode end processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easier to select an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation, for example, in a predetermined number of games after the ST mode ends. To do. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the discharge error command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S419.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying the occurrence of an error in the second special winning opening 37. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 executes other processes corresponding to the received command. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

[Production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as effect contents, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 82, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode of "00H", a value corresponding to the short mode of "01H", a value corresponding to the long mode of "02H", and a value corresponding to the ST mode. It becomes “03H”. The background image and the contents of the effect are different according to the value of the effect mode flag. When it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”, the process is moved to S431. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S432.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes processing in the ST mode. The processing in the ST mode will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the item prefetching effect flag indicating that the item prefetching effect is being executed is ON (ON). If it is determined that the item prefetching effect flag is on (ON), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item prefetching effect flag is not on (ON), the process proceeds to S434.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 executes the item prefetching effect process. The item prefetching effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S435. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process proceeds to S436.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during long mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a long mode medium sub effect content determination table (not shown), the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of variation pattern designation command, and the sub effect selection random number range (lottery value). And the like, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S439.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S437. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “01H” (when the value of the effect mode flag is “00H”), the process proceeds to S438.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the short mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a short mode mid-stage sub-contents determination table (not shown), the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of variation pattern designation command, and the sub-effect selection random number range (lottery value). And the like, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S439.

In S438, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect pattern determination process during the normal mode. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub effect content determination table (for the normal mode), a part of which is shown in FIG. 54, and outputs the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub effect. Based on the selection random number range (lottery value) and the like, processing for determining the effect pattern is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S439.

In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect pattern determined in any of the processes of S435, S437, and S438 shown in FIG. 82 is the item prefetch effect. If it is determined that the decided effect pattern is the item prefetch effect, the process proceeds to S440. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determined effect pattern is not the item prefetch effect, the process proceeds to S441.

In S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) the item prefetching effect flag in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting effect data according to the determined effect pattern type. When this process ends, the effect pattern determination process routine ends.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect when the variation pattern designation command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the winning effect determination process of S115 of the first starting port switch check process shown in FIG. 63 or S125 of the second starting port switch check process shown in FIG. 64, the main CPU 61 performs “prefetching effect”. The item prefetching effect may be executed when is determined. That is, whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect may be controlled by the main CPU 61 side. In this case, the variation pattern designation command may include information on whether or not the "pre-reading effect" by the main CPU 61 is possible, or the sub CPU 71 may determine whether or not the "pre-reading effect" included in the received start prize command. Information may be held in advance, and the effect pattern may be determined by also referring to the held information.

Further, the effect contents of the item prefetch effect (for example, the number of plates A to D and the expectation of each expectation type) may be determined on the main CPU 61 side. In this case, a variation pattern may be set for each effect content of the item prefetching effect, and the sub CPU 71 may perform the item prefetching effect based on the content of the variation pattern designating command corresponding to the determined variation pattern. When the variation pattern is selected, the sub CPU 71 performs the item prefetching effect by separately determining the effect content of the item prefetching effect and transmitting the variation pattern designating command including the information of the decided effect content. It may be that. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect, and determines the effect contents of the item prefetching effect. Whether or not the main CPU 61 executes the item prefetching effect. Of the mode in which the sub CPU 71 determines the effect contents of the item prefetching effect, and the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect, and also determines the effect contents of the item prefetching effect. Aspects are also included.

In addition, regardless of whether the determination subject is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect and the effect contents of the item prefetching effect when executing the item prefetching effect are different from each other by lottery. It is also possible to make a decision by means of a batch lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the item prereading effect, and the effect contents of the item prereading effect when executing the item prereading effect may be determined by a plurality of processes, or may be determined by one process. ..

[Processing in ST mode]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the processing in the ST mode executed by the sub CPU 71. The process in the ST mode is a process for determining the effect pattern as the effect content in the ST mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 83, in S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is “51”. The management counter during ST is a counter indicating the number of times the special symbol game is executed in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the ST management counter is “51”, the process proceeds to S451. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST management counter is not “51”, the process proceeds to S452.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) an in-ST battle effect control flag indicating the ST mode battle reach section in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S452.

In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the ST battle effect control flag is ON (ON). If it is determined that the battle effect control flag during ST is ON (ON), the process proceeds to S453. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST battle effect control flag is not ON (ON), the process proceeds to S454.

In S453, the sub CPU 71 refers to an ST battle production-use sub production content determination table (not shown), the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub production selection random number range (lottery value). And the like, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this processing ends, the processing routine in the ST mode ends.

In S454, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is “0”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the first special symbol game (first game) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is “0”, the process proceeds to S455. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST management counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S457.

In S455, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story introduction effect pattern according to the value of the ST medium-sized resort counter. The ST intermediate game counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the big hit game state (for example, during the second special symbol hit) is continuous in the ST mode except for the so-called first hit. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode progresses in accordance with the number of large-scale condominium games in the ST mode (value of the ST-long-range-village counter). The story introduction effect pattern is an effect pattern for setting effect data at the beginning of the series of story effects in which effects (for example, title display) at the time of introducing the series of stories are executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S456.

In S456, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as the initial value of the number of sets. Regarding the number of sets, in the story section of the ST mode, the number of sets of story production is currently being performed among a total of 10 series of story productions, with five games as one set. Is data indicating. When this process ends, the process moves to S462.

In S457, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST management counter is "1". That is, the sub CPU 71 is the second special symbol game (second game) in the ST mode, and determines whether or not the first special symbol game in which the first set of story effect is started. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is “1”, the process proceeds to S460. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST management counter is not "1", the process proceeds to S458.

In S458, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the ST management counter is “5×the number of sets (however, “9” or less)+1””. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the management counter during ST is “5×1+1=6” (start of second set), “5×2+1=11” (start of third set), “5×3+1=16”. (4th set start), “5×4+1=21” (5th set start), “5×5+1=26” (6th set start), “5×6+1=31” (7th set) Start), “5×7+1=36” (start of 8th set), “5×8+1=41” (start of 9th set), “5×9+1=46” (start of 10th set) Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is these values, the process proceeds to S459. On the other hand, if it is determined that the values of the ST management counter are not these values, the process proceeds to S461.

In S459, the sub CPU 71 performs a set number update process of adding 1 to the set number. When this process ends, the process moves to S460.

In S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story effect pattern according to the number of sets (“1” to “9”) and the value of the ST medium-sized resort counter. By performing the processing in this way, a series of story productions proceeds in the story section of the ST mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S461.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation causes a big hit. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the present symbol variation finally stops and displays the big hit symbol. If it is determined that the variation causes a big hit, the process proceeds to S463. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation does not result in a big hit, the process proceeds to S462.

In step S462, the sub CPU 71 updates the ST management counter by adding 1 to the value of the ST management counter. When this processing ends, the processing routine in the ST mode ends.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 executes the ST story effect pattern changing process. The process of changing the story effect pattern in ST will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the processing routine in the ST mode ends.

[ST story production pattern change processing during ST]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the ST story effect pattern changing process executed by the sub CPU 71. This ST story effect pattern changing process is a process for changing the effect pattern as the effect content when a big hit occurs in the story section of the ST mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 84, in S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the remaining effect time of the basic effect time for one set from the value of the ST management counter. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination in the story section of the ST mode (ST game state) is a loss is basically set to 2 s (2000 ms). ing. That is, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the first variation pattern corresponding to the first variation time (2s) is determined with high probability. .. Further, the basic effect time for one set (5 special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode is set to be 10 s (10000 ms). That is, the time that is obtained by multiplying the first variation time (2 s) by the predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set) is set as the basic effect time (10 s), and the story effect corresponding to the value of the number of sets is advanced. ..

When the value of the management counter during ST indicates the first game in one set (for example, the values of the management counter during ST are "1" and "6"), the sub CPU 71 is 10s (10s-0s). Is calculated as the remaining effect time, and when it indicates the second game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “2”, “7”), 8s (10s-2s) is the remaining effect time. When the third game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “3”, “8”) is indicated, 6s (10s-4s) is calculated as the remaining effect time, When the fourth game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is "4" or "9") is indicated, 4s (10s-6s) is calculated as the remaining effect time, and 5 in one set. When the game number (for example, the value of the ST management counter is "5" or "10") is indicated, 2s (10s-8s) is calculated as the remaining effect time. That is, the sub CPU 71 calculates the remaining effect time with respect to the basic effect time according to the number of games remaining in one set. When this process ends, the process moves to S471.

Note that in S470, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for calculating the remaining effect time of the basic effect time for one set from the value of the ST management counter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the process is not limited to this. An in-set counter that counts the number of games (or the number of effects) may be provided, and a process of calculating (selecting) the remaining effect time of the basic effect time for one set from the value of the in-set counter may be performed. For example, when the value of the in-set counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is “1”), the sub CPU 71 calculates (selects) 10 s as the remaining effect time. However, when it indicates the second game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is “2”), 8s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and the third game in one set (for example, When the value of the in-set counter indicates "3"), 6s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and the fourth game (for example, the value of the in-set counter is "4") in one set. When it is shown, 4 s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and when it is the fifth game in one set (for example, the value of the counter in the set is “5”), 2 s is the remaining effect. It may be calculated (selected) as time.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is the same as the change time determined in the change. For example, if the remaining effect time is 6 s (6000 ms) and the variation time is 6 s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining effect time and the variation time are the same. If it is determined that the remaining presentation time and the variation time are the same, the process proceeds to S472. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining presentation time and the variation time are not the same, the process proceeds to S473.

In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the big hit notification effect data at the end of the setting. The big hit notification effect data at the end of the set is effect data for notifying that the big hit game state is entered in synchronization with the end of the set currently being executed in the story section of the ST mode. In this way, when the remaining production time and the variation time are the same, the story production in the set is executed normally until the end of the set currently being executed, and it is a big hit at the end of the set currently being executed. It is announced. In addition, without setting the big hit notification effect data at the end of the set (that is, not to notify the big hit by a special effect), it was a big hit due to the combination of decorative patterns at the end of the set May be announced. When this process ends, the ST story effect pattern changing process routine ends.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is longer than the change time determined in the change. For example, if the remaining effect time is 8 s (8000 ms) and the variation time is 6 s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining effect time is longer than the variation time. If it is determined that the remaining effect time is longer than the change time, the process proceeds to S474. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining effect time is not longer than the fluctuation time (remaining effect time is shorter than the fluctuation time), the process proceeds to S475.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of advancing the story effect pattern that is determined such that the remaining effect time and the variation time are the same. For example, when the remaining effect time is 8 s (8000 ms) and the variable time is 6 s (6000 ms), 8 s (8000 ms) is used when the story effect in the set is normally executed until the currently executing set ends. ), the sub CPU 71 advances the story effect in the set so that the story effect in the remaining set ends in 6 s (6000 ms), and the remaining effect time ends and the variable time ends. Control to synchronize. After proceeding with the story effect in the set, similar to the process of S472, the big hit notification effect data at the end of the set is set, and the big hit is announced at the end of the currently executed set. Alternatively, different effect data may be set. Further, instead of notifying that the jackpot has been hit, it may be notified that the jackpot has been hit by the combination mode of the decorative designs at the end of the set. When this process ends, the ST story effect pattern changing process routine ends.

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the possible production time by subtracting the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 from the change time. That is, when the remaining effect time is shorter than the change time, the sub CPU 71 is a predetermined set after the currently executed set, and at the end of the set, it becomes a big hit and the story effect ends. In the following production end target set, the production possible time for synchronizing the end of the production end target set and the end of the variation time is calculated. When this process ends, the process moves to S476.

In S476, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the production available time calculated in the process of S475 is longer than the basic production time (10 s (10000 ms)). For example, if the remaining effect time is 4 s (4000 ms) and the variation time is 30 s (30000 ms), the effectable time is calculated as 26 s (26000 ms). In this case, the sub CPU 71 causes the effectable time (26 s). ) Is longer than the basic effect time (10 s). If it is determined that the possible production time is longer than the basic production time, the process proceeds to S477. On the other hand, when it is determined that the possible production time is not longer than the basic production time (the possible production time is shorter than the basic production time), the process proceeds to S478.

In S477, the sub CPU 71 carries out a process of setting special effect data during ST which suggests that a big hit will occur in the effect end target set. In the present embodiment, when the available production time is longer than the basic production time, the production end target set is a set subsequent to the set currently being executed. In this case, as a so-called premier effect, a suggestion effect (special effect mode) of a big hit based on the special effect data during ST is executed. The process of S477 may be performed without performing the process of S476. That is, even when the effect ending target set is the next set of the currently executed set, the suggestive effect (special effect mode) of the big hit based on the special effect data during ST may be executed. A specific screen display example (effect example) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110.

In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining the story effect pattern of the set subsequent to the decided story effect pattern so that the effectable time and the time until the effect end of the effect end target set are the same. For example, when the available production time is 6 s (6000 ms), the next set of the set currently being executed is the production end target set. Therefore, the sub CPU 71 determines that the story production in the next set that is the production end target set is By determining the story effect pattern that will end in 6 s (6000 ms), control is performed such that the end of the production available time and the end of the effect of the effect end target set are synchronized. After executing the story effect in the effect ending target set, similarly to the process of S472, the big hit notification effect data at the end of the setting is set, and the big hit is notified at the end of the effect ending target set. Alternatively, different effect data may be set. In addition, it may be notified that the big hit has been made by the combination mode of the decorative patterns at the end of the production end target set without notifying that the big hit has been made. When this process ends, the ST story effect pattern changing process routine ends.

[Item prefetch effect processing]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the item prefetching effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The item prefetching effect process is a process when the item prefetching effect is determined as the effect pattern in the normal mode or the time saving mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 85, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation has started. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the current symbol variation is the special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command for which the item prefetch effect is determined. If it is determined that the fluctuation has started, the process moves to S481. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation is not the case, the process proceeds to S482.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 executes the item use effect process of basically performing the effect for using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as the items in the variation. This item use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. When this process ends, the item prefetching effect process routine ends.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether any one of the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D corresponding to the determined item prefetch effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55) is one or more. To do. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S483. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the item prefetching effect processing routine ends.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the special symbol fluctuation pattern is a shortened fluctuation. When it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation pattern is a shortened fluctuation, the item prefetch effect processing routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is not a shortened variation, the process proceeds to S484.

In S484, the sub CPU 71 executes an item acquisition effect process for determining whether or not the player should acquire a plate as an item before the change in advance. This item acquisition effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. When this process ends, the item prefetching effect process routine ends.

As described above, in the item prefetching effect, an item (for example, plate) may be acquired before the change, or all items (for example, plate) may be acquired during the change, but before the change, In the case where a shortened fluctuation (for example, a shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is 2000 ms) is relatively shorter than a normal fluctuation (for example, a normal fluctuation whose fluctuation time is 4000 ms) is determined as a special symbol fluctuation pattern, The item acquisition effect process is not performed, and the item (for example, plate) is not acquired in advance (that is, the advance notification effect in the item acquisition effect process described below is not performed). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the production balance from being lost due to the relationship with the variation time (particularly, shortening variation) even when the item prefetching production is executed. In addition, in the predetermined symbol variation before the variation, the normal variation is determined as the special symbol variation pattern, but depending on the number of holdings (for example, when the number of holdings is 3 or more) shortening variation Even when the change is made, in the process of S482, similarly, it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, and the item acquisition effect process is not performed.

[Item use performance processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the item use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The item use effect process is a process for basically performing an effect of using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as the items in the variation, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 86, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 does not acquire all the plates even by the item acquisition effect process described later, and the plate A, the plate B, and the plate C corresponding to the determined item prefetch effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55). , And the number of plates D is one or more. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S491. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S492.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting plate acquisition effect data for acquiring all the remaining plates. For example, “item prefetch effect 15” (see FIGS. 54 and 55) is determined, and the remaining plates are one plate A, one plate B, one plate C, and one plate D. In this case, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for performing the effect of sequentially acquiring the plates A to D at the start of the fluctuation. When this process ends, the process moves to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a pseudo continuous effect. Basically, the decorative design starts its fluctuation in response to the start of fluctuation of the special design, and stops the fluctuation in response to the fluctuation stop of the special design, but the pseudo-reproduction is during the fluctuation of the special design. The effect of temporarily stopping and re-changing only the decorative pattern is an effect that makes it look as if the pattern was changed pseudo multiple times. The number of times of temporary stop/re-variation of the decorative pattern is the pseudo-series number (pseudo-series number), and the larger the number of pseudo-series, the higher the expectation of being a big hit. In addition, for example, when the determined effect pattern is "item prefetch effect 15", more specifically, "item prefetch effect 15" (pseudo consecutive effect data=pseudo consecutive number 0 times) to "item prefetch effect" It is possible to determine any one of "15" (pseudo continuous production data = pseudo continuous number of 4 times). That is, even if the same "item prefetching effect 15" is used in the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different pseudo consecutive numbers (0 to 4 times). However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when the pseudo consecutive number is 0, the effect pattern of the item prefetch effect in which the number of the plates A is 1 or more is not determined. In this way, in S492, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a pseudo continuous number of 1 or more is determined. If it is determined that there is a pseudo continuous effect, the process proceeds to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no pseudo continuous effect, the process proceeds to S496.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A is acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S495.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes plate A use effect processing. This plate A use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87. When this process ends, the process moves to S496.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the pseudo continuous effect data that is predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the pseudo continuous effect is performed according to a predetermined pseudo continuous number (0 to 4 times). When this process ends, the process moves to S496.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a dialogue effect. The serif effect is an effect of displaying the serif of a predetermined character in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the change of the special symbol, and the expectation of being a big hit is displayed differently depending on the color of the serif. It is a thing. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation of being a big hit in the order of serif (white), serif (yellow), serif (green), and serif (red) increases. Note that, for example, when the determined effect pattern is "item prefetch effect 15", more specifically, "item prefetch effect 15" (no serif effect data = no serif effect), "item prefetch effect 15" It is possible to determine any one of (serif effect data=serif (white)) to “item prefetch effect 15” (serif effect data=serif (red)). That is, even if the same "item prefetching effect 15" is used in the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns in which the presence or absence of the serif effect and the color are different. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effects, when there is no dialogue effect, the effect pattern of the item prefetch effect in which the number of the plates B is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a dialogue effect has been determined. If it is determined that there is a dialogue effect, the process proceeds to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no dialogue effect, the process proceeds to S500.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process proceeds to S498. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been obtained, the process proceeds to S499.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 executes plate B use effect processing. The plate B use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. When this process ends, the process moves to S500.

In S499, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting dialogue effect data that is predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that the dialogue effect corresponding to the predetermined color of the dialogue effect is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S500.

In S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a cut-in effect. The cut-in effect is an effect in which a predetermined character is cut in and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the change of the special symbol, and if the expectation of being a big hit varies depending on the color of the cut-in. It is what is displayed. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation of being a big hit in the order of cut-in (white), cut-in (yellow), cut-in (green), and cut-in (red) becomes higher. Note that, for example, when the determined effect pattern is "item prefetch effect 15", more specifically, "item prefetch effect 15" (no cut-in effect data = no cut-in effect), "item prefetch effect" 15" (cut-in effect data = cut-in (white)) to "item prefetch effect 15" (cut-in effect data = cut-in (red)) can be determined. That is, even if the same "item prefetching effect 15" is used in the notation of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different cut-in effects and different colors. However, from the viewpoint of ensuring the consistency of the effect, when there is no cut-in effect, the effect pattern of the item prefetch effect in which the number of the plates C is 1 or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a cut-in effect has been determined. If it is determined that there is a cut-in effect, the process proceeds to S501. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no cut-in effect, the process proceeds to S504.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process proceeds to S502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S503.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes plate C use effect processing. This plate C use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89. When this process ends, the process moves to S504.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting cut-in effect data that is predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 controls so that a cut-in effect corresponding to a predetermined cut-in effect color is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D is acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been obtained, the process proceeds to S506.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes plate D use effect processing. Plate D has a relatively high probability of being obtained when the result of the big hit determination (winning) is a hit, as compared to the case of losing (see FIGS. 54 and 55 ), so plate D is The expectation that it is a big hit just by getting it is high. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 determines that the result of the big hit determination (winning) is a win, and if the big hit symbols are "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", a hit effect pattern determination described later with reference to FIG. 91. When the plate D is carried over so that the plate D is used in the process, it is possible to perform the process of carrying the plate D over. In addition, in other cases, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special effect change data. The special effect change data is obtained by directly or indirectly applying the plate D to the effect data set in the processing of S494 (FIG. 87), S495, S498 (FIG. 88), S499, S502 (FIG. 89), or S503. Is data for changing the effect to be performed so as to have a higher expectation. For example, even when it is determined that there is a cut-in effect and it is determined that the plate C is not acquired, the cut-in effect data that is predetermined by the effect pattern is converted to S502 (see FIG. The process is changed in the same manner as the process of 89). At that time, the effect of directly using the plate D may be performed, or the effect of converting the plate D into the plate C and using the plate D may be performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S506.

The manner of changing the effect based on the special effect change data is not limited to the above-described aspect. As an example, it may be possible to adopt a mode in which the effect is changed so that the fact that the big hit has been notified by a variable display mode and a stop display mode different from the normal decorative pattern variable display mode and the stationary display mode. For example, in a predetermined effect mode (including the effect mode in the variation of the item prefetch effect), first, the reach state is reached, and then the effect occurs (develops) before the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, and the super reach state is reached. After that, when it is a big hit, the combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and when it is not a big hit, it is configured to be stopped and displayed with a reach lose eye. In the case where the change is a big hit, if the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired), the predetermined effect should be obtained. In the aspect, where the combination of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, the decorative pattern is to be stopped and displayed at the reach losing eyes, and then, when the effect of starting the pseudo next normal variation of the game is performed Alternatively, the effect using the plate D may be performed, and the effect may be changed so that the combination of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. Further, as another example, when there are a plurality of super reach states having different expectations, the special effects change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired), and the expectations are further increased. The effect may be changed so as to generate a high super reach state.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the acquired number of plates. The sub CPU 71 also performs a process of clearing (OFF) the item prefetching effect flag. When this process ends, the item use effect process routine ends.

[Plate A use performance processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the plate A use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate A use effect process is a process for causing the acquired plate A to act and executing the pseudo continuous effect in the variation, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 87, in S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of pseudo stations is greater than the number of acquired plates A. For example, if the number of pseudo stations is 3 and the number of obtained plates A is 2, the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of pseudo stations is greater than the number of obtained plates A. If it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is greater than the number of obtained plates A, the process proceeds to S511. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is not greater than the number of obtained plates A (the number of pseudo stations is less than or equal to the number of obtained plates A), the process proceeds to S512.

In S511, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data of pseudo continuous stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect of the pseudo continuous stop will be described later with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. When this process ends, the process moves to S513.

In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data for normal temporary stop, effect data for using plate A, and effect data for pseudo continuous stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect of the normal temporary stop and the use of the plate A will be described later with reference to FIGS. When this process ends, the process moves to S513.

In step S513, the sub CPU 71 performs the pseudo-consecutive-number updating process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo-consecutive number. When this process ends, the process moves to S514.

In S514, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the pseudo consecutive number is “0”. When it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is “0”, the plate A use effect processing routine ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo consecutive number is not “0”, the process proceeds to S510.

[Plate B use effect processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the plate B use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate B use effect process is a process for operating the acquired plate B to execute the dialogue effect in the variation, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 88, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of temporarily setting dialogue production data having a lower expectation than the predetermined dialogue production data according to the number of plates B. For example, the sub CPU 71, when the serif effect data determined in advance is serif (red) and the number of plates B is one, the serif effect data having a low expectation for one plate B (green). Temporarily set. Further, for example, when the predetermined dialogue production data is the dialogue (red) and the number of the plates B is two, the sub CPU 71 is a dialogue production data having a low expectation for two plates B ( Temporarily set (yellow). When this process ends, the process moves to S521.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the temporarily set dialogue production data with a low expectation, the production data using the plate B, and the original dialogue production data. By setting these effect data, when the number of plates B is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the serif effect data of the serif (green) is executed first, and then the plate B is used. The effect corresponding to the effect data using one sheet is executed to notify that the expectation of the serif effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the serif effect data of the serif (red) is executed. Further, in the above example, when the number of plates B is two, the effect corresponding to the serif effect data of the serif (yellow) is executed first, and then the effect data corresponding to the use of two plate B is applied. Is notified that the expectation of the serif effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the serif effect data of the serif (red) is executed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect as if the expectation of the serif effect was improved by the action of the plate B. When this process ends, the plate B use effect process routine ends.

[Plate C use effect processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the plate C use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate C use effect process is a process for operating the acquired plate C to execute the cut-in effect in the variation, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 89, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of temporarily setting cut-in effect data having a lower expectation than the predetermined cut-in effect data according to the number of plates C. For example, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is one, the sub CPU 71 cuts the cut-in effect data with low expectation for one plate C. Temporarily set the in (green). In addition, for example, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is 2, the sub CPU 71 uses the cut-in effect data having low expectations for two plates C. Temporarily set a certain cut-in (yellow). When this process ends, the process moves to S531.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the temporarily set cut-in effect data with a low degree of expectation, effect data using the plate C, and the original cut-in effect data. By setting these effect data, when the number of the plates C is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the cut-in (green) cut-in effect data is executed first, and then It is notified that the effect corresponding to the effect data that uses one plate C is executed to increase the expectation of the cut-in effect, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in (red) cut-in effect data is executed. It In the above example, when the number of plates C is two, the effect corresponding to the cut-in (yellow) cut-in effect data is first executed, and then the effect data corresponding to the use of two plate C is applied. Is notified that the expectation of the cut-in effect is high, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in (red) cut-in effect data is executed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect as if the expectation of the cut-in effect was improved by the action of the plate C. When this process ends, the plate C use effect process routine ends.

[Item acquisition performance processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the item acquisition effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item acquisition effect process is a process for executing an effect that causes the player to acquire a plate as an item before the change, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 90, in S540, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A is acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process proceeds to S541. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S544. In S541, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of performing a plate A display lottery that determines whether to display an effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S542.

In S542, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate A display lottery has been won, the process proceeds to S543. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S544.

In step S543, the sub CPU 71 performs a plate A sheet number updating process for subtracting 1 from the plate A sheet number. When there are a plurality of plates A, it may be determined whether or not to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate A display lottery, and whether or not to display a plurality of the number of plates A. May be In the latter case, a plurality of plates A will be subtracted in this process. When this process ends, the process moves to S544.

In S544, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process proceeds to S545. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S548.

In S545, the sub CPU 71 performs a plate B display lottery to determine whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S546.

In S546, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate B display lottery has been won, the process proceeds to S547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S548.

In step S547, the sub CPU 71 updates the number of plates B by subtracting 1 from the number of plates B. When there are a plurality of plates B, it may be determined whether or not to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate B display lottery, and whether or not to display a plurality of plates B is determined. May be In the latter case, a plurality of plates B will be subtracted in this process. When this process ends, the process moves to S548.

In S548, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C is acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process proceeds to S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S552.

In S549, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of performing a plate C display lottery that determines whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate C has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S550.

In S550, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate C display lottery has been won, the process proceeds to S551. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S552.

In step S551, the sub CPU 71 updates the number of plates C by subtracting 1 from the number of plates C. When there are a plurality of plates C, it may be determined whether or not to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate C display lottery, and whether or not to display a plurality of plates C is determined. May be In the latter case, the number of plates C is subtracted in this process. When this process ends, the process moves to S552. In S552, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S556.

In S553, the sub CPU 71 executes a plate D display lottery to determine whether or not to display the effect image indicating that the plate D is acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S554.

In S554, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D display lottery has been won. If it is determined that the plate D display lottery has been won, the process proceeds to S555. On the other hand, when it is determined that the plate D display lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to S556.

In S555, the sub CPU 71 performs a plate D sheet number update process of subtracting 1 from the plate D sheet number. When there are a plurality of plates D, it may be determined whether or not to display one by one by the above-mentioned plate D display lottery, and whether or not to display a plurality of plates D is determined. May be In the latter case, a plurality of plates D will be subtracted in this process. When this process ends, the process moves to S556.

In S556, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting plate display effect data corresponding to the plate won in the display lottery (S541, S545, S549, S553). With this plate display effect data, the number of target plates won in each of the above display lottery is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 as an effect image. When this process ends, the item acquisition effect process routine ends.

Here, as an example in which a plate (item) is acquired by the item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 91, it is determined that the item use effect processing shown in FIG. 86 is executed in the special symbol game after three games. It is the case (when the special symbol game after three games is the variation), and the case where each of the plates A to D is acquired is described as an example.

In the special symbol game of the first game (two games before the change), for example, if the player wins the plate A display lottery and the plate D display lottery, an effect image showing that one plate A has been acquired, and An effect image showing that one plate D has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Next, in the special symbol game of the second game (one game before the variation), for example, when the plate B display lottery is won, the effect image showing that one plate B has been acquired is the liquid crystal display device 4 Is displayed in the display area 4A. Then, in the special symbol game of the third game (variation concerned), for the remaining plates C not shown to be acquired by the item acquisition effect processing shown in FIG. 91, one plate C has been acquired. Is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see S491 of FIG. 86), and the item prefetching effect using these plates (items) is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, before the variation is started, the advance notification effect (for example, the plates A to D is acquired to notify the type of the item (for example, the plates A to D) in the item prefetching effect. It is configured to determine whether or not to perform an effect image indicating that the user is present. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (effect based on the starting memory before the variation execution) when giving a big hit notification (notice of transition to a specific game state). ..

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a hit effect pattern that is an effect pattern in the big hit game state, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 91, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12. Here, the hit effect pattern flag is an internal flag indicating the hit patterns 1 to 12 (see FIG. 50), and the hit effect pattern flags “01H” to “0CH” are set corresponding to the hit patterns 1 to 12, respectively. To be done. The hit effect pattern flag may be set according to the information of the big hit symbol included in the received symbol designating command, and may be set according to the similar information included in the received hit start display command. May be That is, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the type of the big hit to be started is the hit pattern 12 (the big hit symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol). If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12, the process proceeds to S561. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate the hit pattern 12, the process proceeds to S566.

In S561, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the ST mode is in effect. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag described above is “03H”. If it is determined that the ST mode is in effect, the process moves to S563. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST mode is not in effect, the process proceeds to S562.

In S562, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an SP bonus promotion winning effect pattern. When the hit effect pattern flag indicates the hit pattern 12, and when it is not in the ST mode, it is basically the case where the big hit symbol "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time saving mode. The SP bonus promotion hit effect pattern, which indicates in the SP bonus that the mode shifts (promotes) to the ST mode through the SP bonus during the second special symbol hit from the time saving mode, is decided. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

In S563, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the value of the ST management counter is “50” or less. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a big hit has been made in the story section of the ST mode (whether or not the big hit has been connected). If it is determined that the value of the ST management counter is equal to or less than “50”, the process proceeds to S564. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST management counter is not “50” or less, the process proceeds to S565.

In S564, the sub CPU 71 carries out a process of determining an SP bonus-related story per effect pattern in accordance with the value of the ST condominium counter and the value of the ST management counter. In the present embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode is supposed to proceed in accordance with the number of consecutive villas in the ST mode (value of the ST villa counter). The series of story productions that are performed are carried over from the story section in ST mode to the SP bonus during the second special symbol hit. Therefore, per SP bonus related story according to the number of big villas in ST mode (value of ST middle villa counter) and progress status of story in ST mode story section (value of management counter in ST) The production pattern is decided. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect pattern per SP bonus related story will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

In S565, the sub CPU 71 conducts processing for determining a SP bonus battle winning effect pattern. The SP bonus battle hit effect pattern is a hit effect pattern that is determined when a big hit occurs in the ST mode battle reach section, and includes one character (for example, a ally character) in the ST mode battle reach section and other characters. Is a hit effect pattern for executing an effect related to the battle scene of the character (for example, enemy character) in the SP bonus. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

In S566, the sub CPU 71 refers to the hit effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and performs processing for determining the hit effect pattern in accordance with the type of the hit pattern indicated by the hit effect pattern flag. As described above, when determining the hit effect pattern according to the type of more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46), the hit effect pattern flag should be defined in more detail. Alternatively, the hit effect pattern may be determined according to the hit effect pattern flag and other information indicating a more detailed hit pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to S567.

In S567, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D is acquired. More specifically, in the plate D use effect process of S505 of the item use effect process shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether the number of carried-over plates D is 1 or more. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S568. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the hit effect pattern determination processing routine ends.

In S568, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the hit effect pattern so as to be a promotion (reverse) pattern, in accordance with the determined type of the hit pattern. For example, if a plate D is acquired when a live bonus (success in live bonus 9R) is determined as a winning effect pattern, a live bonus (failure in live bonus 4R) is provisionally set as an effect pattern. A process of setting effect data corresponding to the temporarily set live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), effect data using the plate D, and effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is performed. By setting these effect data, the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is first executed in the live bonus, and then, in the first branch section described later, It is notified that the effect corresponding to the effect data of using the plate D is executed to promote (reverse) the live bonus, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (successful live bonus 9R) is executed. Change the hit production pattern as follows. When this process ends, the hit effect pattern determination process routine ends.

[Hit start effect processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit start effect process is a process for starting an effect in the big hit game state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 92, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as the hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether to start the live bonus during the first special symbol hit. If it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the process proceeds to S571. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the process proceeds to S572.

In S571, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a valid period timer according to a start time of an initial section described later of the determined music pattern. That is, when the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 performs control to start the effect using the music pattern from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit game state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 4000 ms is set as the valid period timer. It should be noted that an example of presentation of music patterns and an example of screen display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94, 53, 55 and 56. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting an effective period timer corresponding to the time corresponding to the hit start interval time. That is, when the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 performs control to start the effect according to the hit effect pattern so as to be synchronized with the start of the big hit game state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 10000 ms is set as the effective period timer. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

[Hit end effect processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect process is a process for ending the effect in the big hit game state based on the determined hit effect pattern, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 93, in S580, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probable change. That is, the sub-CPU 71, the type of big jackpot to finish is hit patterns 1 to 6 (big jackpot pattern "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6" of the first special symbol) or hit pattern 12 (big jackpot symbol "probability variation 1 of the second special symbol" )) is determined. If it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag indicates a probability change, the process proceeds to S581. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit effect pattern flag does not indicate a probability change, the process proceeds to S585.

In S581, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST medium-sized resort counter is “1” or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred in the ST mode (whether or not the big hit has run together). If it is determined that the value of the ST medium-sized resort counter is “1” or more, the process proceeds to S582. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST medium-sized resort counter is not “1” or more (“0”), the process proceeds to S583.

In S582, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST medium-sized resort counter which adds 1 to the value of the ST medium-sized property counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S584.

In S583, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "1" as the initial value of the ST medium-sized resort counter. As a result, the first series of story productions are performed in the ST mode story section after the so-called first win. When this process ends, the process moves to S584.

In the present embodiment, the number of consecutive villas excluding the so-called first hit is counted by using the ST medium villa counter, but the number of consecutive villas including the first hit may be separately counted. .. In this case, it is possible to separately provide an extended-counter counter that counts the number of extended holidays including the first hit, and from the value of the ST intermediate-duplex counter (for example, add 1 to the value of the ST intermediate-duplex counter). , It is also possible to count the number of consecutive holidays, including the first hit. In this way, by counting the number of consecutive holiday games including the first hit, the count result may be displayed separately from the series of story productions. For example, when the above-mentioned first series of story productions are being performed, by displaying “Big hits for 2 consecutive times” as the display of the number of consecutive villas including the first hit, regardless of the contents of the production, the game is played. It is possible for the player to generally know the number of game media acquired.

In S584, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as an initial value of the ST management counter. As a result, the number of games in the so-called ST mode story section is managed from the beginning. When this process ends, the process moves to S585.

In S585, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as the hit effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the end of the live bonus during the first special symbol hit. When it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the hit effect pattern, the hit end effect processing routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern is not determined as the hit effect pattern, the process proceeds to S586.

In S586, the sub CPU 71 carries out a process of setting effect data at the end of the bonus according to the type of the hit effect pattern. Here, when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern, when the effect corresponding to the music pattern started in the hit start effect processing (see FIG. 92) is not finished, the effect is preferentially executed, The effect data at the end of the bonus is not set. That is, the effect according to the music pattern is not overwritten on the effect at the end of the bonus. When this process ends, the hit end effect process routine ends.

Although illustration is omitted, in the hit end effect process, the sub CPU 71 operates the return button 24 to return a card (for example, a pre-baid card) from the card unit 84 when the so-called first hit ends. A process for setting the forgotten card removal notification effect data for executing the forgotten card removal notification for prompting the player to perform is performed. This notification of forgetting to take the card may be executed together with the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus. At the end of so-called first win, it is executed in place of the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus. It may be done. Further, even when the hit effect pattern is a music pattern and the effect based on this music pattern is not finished at the end of the so-called first hit, the forgetting to remove the card notification may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 113, various effects in the present embodiment will be described using effect examples and screen display examples.

[Example of live bonus production]
93 and 94 are diagrams showing examples of live bonus effects. 93 and 94 show an example of an effect in the case of the music pattern A as an example of a live bonus.

The upper part of FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 and the live bonus music pattern A (success) is selected as the hit effect pattern. As for the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A continues with the initial section (6s) in which the intro part of the music pattern A is output, the first section (22s) in which the A-melody part of the music pattern A is output. The first branch section (7s) first indicating whether or not, the second section (22s) in which the B melody part of the music pattern A is output, and the second section next indicating whether or not the music pattern A continues. It is composed of a branch section (9s) and a third section (25s) in which the chorus portion of the music pattern A is output and the specific second round game is suggested to be executed. The output time shown in parentheses in each section (including the fourth section and the fifth section to be described later) is an example, and the average digestion time of each round (for each long release or short release) and the interval between rounds. The time corresponding to the interval and the musical tone of the musical composition corresponding to the musical composition pattern can be comprehensively set.

In the music pattern A (success), an intro part which is an initial common part of a predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the big hit game state is started, and then a predetermined music piece is synchronized with the start of the big hit game state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is indicated whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) started from the final stage of the 3rd round. Then, the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle stage of the 4th R, and then, in a specific branch period (second branch section) started from the opening stage of the 7R It is indicated whether or not the music piece of No. 2 continues to be output, and then the chorus portion that is a specific portion of the predetermined music piece is output from the middle stage of the 8th round.

The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect when the hit pattern is a hit pattern 7 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The musical composition pattern A (failure) includes the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), the above-mentioned second section (22s), and the above-mentioned second section (22s). It is composed of a second branch section (9s) and a fourth section (13s) which indicates that the chorus portion of the music pattern A is not output and the specific second round game is not executed.

In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from the predetermined time before the big hit game state starts, and then the big hit game state The A melody part, which is the first common part of the predetermined music, is output so as to be synchronized with the start, and then, in the predetermined branch period (first branch interval) started from the end of the 3rd R, It is indicated whether or not the output is continued, then the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music, is output from the middle stage of the 4th R, and then the specific branch started from the opening stage of the 7th R. In the period (second branch section), it is indicated whether or not the output of the predetermined music continues, and then, from the middle part of the 8R, the chorus portion which is the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output, and the specific second It is shown that the round game is not executed.

The upper part of FIG. 95 shows an example of an effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3 and the live bonus music pattern A (reverse) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The musical composition pattern A (reverse rotation) is the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and a predetermined sound is output and the specified second round game is played. It is composed of the fifth section (13s) which is suggested to be executed. The predetermined sound output in the fifth section may be a chorus portion in the music pattern A (that is, the third section and the fifth section may be the same), and other predetermined sounds in the music pattern A may be included. It may be a part (for example, a C melody part), or may be a specific sound effect related to a predetermined music indicating that it has been reversed (the specific second round game is executed). Further, after the specific sound effect is output, a part of the chorus portion or another portion may be output.

In the music pattern A (reverse rotation), an intro part which is an initial common part of a predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the big hit game state starts, and then a predetermined music piece is synchronized with the start of the big hit game state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is indicated whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) started from the final stage of the 3rd round. Next, a predetermined sound that is a specific portion of a predetermined music piece is output from the middle of the 4th R.

The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) is composed of the above-mentioned initial section (6s), the above-mentioned first section (22s), the above-mentioned first branch section (7s), and the above-mentioned fourth section (13s). There is.

In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from the predetermined time before the big hit game state is started, and then the big hit game state The A melody part, which is the first common part of the predetermined music, is output so as to be synchronized with the start, and then, in the predetermined branch period (first branch interval) started from the end of the 3rd R, It is indicated whether or not the output is continued, and next, it is indicated that the specific second round game is not executed without outputting the specific sound which is the specific part of the specific music from the middle stage of the 4R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined song is performed in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3 in which the specific second round game is executed and in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 8 in which the specified second round game is not executed. (For example, the music corresponding to the music pattern A) The first common portion (for example, A melody of the first section) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Then, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, after the elapse of this predetermined branch period, a specific portion of a predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) Output. With such a configuration, the player's expectation in the big hit game state (specific game state) can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, 1R in which the initial section is started) at which the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music is started. By configuring so that the output of a predetermined song (for example, the output of the intro in the initial section) is started during the waiting time before the start of the eyes), it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game, and the control load increases. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, in any of the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, the big hit game state of the hit pattern 8, the big hit game state of the hit pattern 1 and the big hit game state of the hit pattern 7, a predetermined music piece (for example, The first common part (for example, A melody of the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Here, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, after the elapse of this predetermined branch period, the specific portion of the predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed (for example, the reverse of the fifth section). In the big hit game state of the hit pattern 1 and the big hit game state of the hit pattern 7, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and a specific branch period. (For example, the second branch section) is passed. Then, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 1, after a lapse of this particular branch period, a particular portion of a predetermined music suggesting that the particular second round game is executed (for example, the chorus of the third section) Output. With this configuration, the player's expectation in the specific game state can be further increased.

Note that the music pattern B (success) and the music pattern C (determined) basically have the same configuration as the music pattern A (success), and the music pattern B (reverse) is basically the music pattern A (reverse). The music pattern B (failure) basically has the same structure as the music pattern A (failure), but a part or all of the output times of the defined sections are different from each other. It is also possible to configure so that, or a part of the prescribed sections may not be provided.

In addition, for example, in the first branch section and/or the second branch section, an effect of prompting the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A may be performed. The portion of the predetermined music corresponding to the section following the section may be output earlier than when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated a predetermined number of times.

[Screen display example during normal operation]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a screen display example in a normal state. The normal time here means the time of execution of the effect mode such as the normal mode or the time saving mode. As shown in the figure, basically, on the screen of the display area 4A in the normal time, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, the first holding number information 701 corresponding to the starting memory of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol The second holding number information 702 corresponding to the starting memory of the symbol is displayed.

The plurality of decorative symbols 700 form, for example, three columns, and the numerical symbols “1” to “7” are displayed in each column in a variable display mode or a stop display mode. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are variably displayed and stopped in association with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. When the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, basically, the display state is changed from the variable display state to the stop display state with all the same numerical symbols. The stop display mode of the decorative pattern 700 other than these is basically lost.

The first holding quantity information 701 and the second holding quantity information 702 are displayed by holding marks corresponding to the holding quantity corresponding to the starting storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The holding marks indicating the first holding number information 701 and the second holding number information 702 are additionally displayed up to an upper limit of 4 according to the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, respectively. The holding marks indicating the first holding number information 701 and the second holding number information 702 are, when the decorative symbols start to be variably displayed together with the special symbols based on the starting memory of the corresponding first special symbols and the second special symbols, respectively. It disappears from the right end side and disappears. When both the holding marks of the first holding number information 701 and the second holding number information 702 are displayed, since the starting memory of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting memory of the first special symbol, The hold mark of the second hold number information 702 is erased in preference to the hold mark of the first hold number information 701.

Although not particularly shown, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various effect modes, depending on the effect contents. Of course, the same display image, background image, or the like may be displayed even in different effect modes.

[Screen display example of music pattern A]
97 and 98 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the music pattern A. FIG. In the above-mentioned initial section, the first to fifth sections, the first branch section and the second branch section, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is interlocked with the music being output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c. Also, the effect image is displayed. Although the effect image corresponding to the initial section is omitted in FIGS. 97 and 98, it is assumed that, for example, an effect image such as a title display in which a music title is displayed according to the intro part is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the first section of the music pattern A, a predetermined character sings the A melody portion in synchronization with the output of the A melody portion which is the first common portion of the predetermined music. The effect image is displayed, and in the first branch section of the music pattern A, the effect image indicating whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued is displayed.

Then, when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, in the fourth section of the music pattern A, an effect image indicating that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed, and the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3. In this case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the specific sound that is the specific portion of the specific music.

When the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 or 7, as shown in FIG. 98, the predetermined character is linked with the output of the B melody part which is the second common part of the predetermined music. An effect image for singing the B melody portion is displayed, and in the second branch section of the music pattern A, an effect image indicating whether or not the output of the predetermined music is continued is displayed.

When the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7, an effect image indicating that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1. In this case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the chorus portion which is the specific portion of the predetermined music.

[Screen display example of story section in ST mode]
99 and 100 are diagrams showing screen display examples in the story section in the ST mode. As shown in FIG. 99, the first reservation number information 701 and the second reservation number information 702 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the story section of the ST mode, and the story corresponding to the current set number. The set story display area 703 (first image display means) for displaying an image (first image), and a planned set for displaying a window image (second image) indicating a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward. A window display area 704 (second image display means) is provided. The decorative pattern 700 may be superimposed on the set story display area 703 with a predetermined transparency and displayed in a variable manner, and reduced to the set story display area 703, the scheduled set window display area 704, or another area. Alternatively, the display may be changed. Alternatively, the decorative pattern 700 may not be displayed in the story section of the ST mode.

As described above, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story effects are to be performed according to the current value of the number of sets and the value of the ST mid-range villa counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the value of the ST Nakarenso counter is “1”, the story effect of “first episode”, which is the first story effect in the series of story effects, is the current story effect. This is performed according to the value of the number of sets, and when the value of the ST Nakarenso counter is "2", the story production is the "second episode" that follows the "first episode" of the series of story productions. The story production will be performed according to the current value of the number of sets. At this time, story images 703a and 703b corresponding to the current number of sets are displayed in the set story display area 703, and window images 704a and 704b suggesting stories corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward are set in the planned set window display area 704. Will be displayed in.

Further, for example, when the number of sets is updated to the next number of sets (added by 1), the story image corresponding to the story suggested by the window image 704a (704b) is displayed in the set story display area 703. While being displayed, the plurality of window images displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 slide to the left, and the update of the number of sets (that is, the progress of story production) is notified. Note that, in FIG. 100, the white window image, the hatched window image, and the black window image displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 are different from each other, and are schematically shown as different window images (that is, different stories). It is a representation.

[Screen display example of production pattern per related story for SP bonus]
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a screen display example of an effect pattern per SP bonus related story. In the present embodiment, a series of story effects are to be performed according to the value of the current set number and the value of the ST middle villa counter in the story section of the ST mode, and a big hit in the story section of the ST mode. In this case, the related story hit effect pattern for SP bonus related to the series of story effects is determined (see FIG. 91).

In the upper part of FIG. 101, a screen display example of the SP bonus related story per effect pattern in the case where the value of the ST intermediate game counter is “1” and the value of the ST management counter is less than “26” is shown. ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" as the related story per SP bonus effect pattern for the SP bonus related to the ST story effect pattern when the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1". In the case of ST, the story synopsis of a series of story productions by the story production pattern during ST is displayed. That is, in this screen display example, a summary of stories in a series of story productions is displayed as the related story production.

The lower part of FIG. 101 shows an example of a screen display of the SP bonus related story per effect pattern when the value of the ST mid-long-term resort counter is “1” and the value of the ST mid-term management counter is “26” or more. ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1" as the related story per SP bonus effect pattern for the SP bonus related to the ST story effect pattern when the value of the ST middle villa counter is "1". In this case, the name scenes of a series of story productions by the story production pattern during ST and the explanation (corresponding story) of the name scenes are displayed. When displaying this name scene, the window image (second image) displayed in the above-mentioned scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) is used. That is, in this screen display example, the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) is displayed as the related story effect. Note that only the window image (second image) may be displayed as the related story effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of shifting from the story section of the ST mode to the SP bonus during the second special symbol hit, in the SP bonus during the second special symbol hit, a series of story production patterns in the ST The related story per SP bonus related story pertinent production pattern related to the story production is configured to be performed. With this configuration, the story effect can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the related story effect based on the SP bonus related story per effect pattern is based on the progress degree of the story in the series of story effects based on the ST story effect pattern (for example, the value of the ST counter counter). It is configured to be displayed. With such a configuration, a series of story effects performed in a predetermined section in the special game state (for example, the ST mode story section) and a specific game state when the jackpot is achieved in the special game state (for example, SP bonus) ), it is possible to give a relation to the related story production performed in (), and it is possible to perform an appropriate related story production in consideration of a big hit.

In the present embodiment, as a story progress degree in a series of story productions, a case where the value of the ST management counter is less than “26” is regarded as a small progress degree of the story, and a summary of the story in the series of story productions. Is displayed, and the case where the value of the management counter during ST is “26” or more indicates that the progress degree is high in the story, the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) Is displayed, but is not limited to this.

For example, the display contents of the summary of the story in the related story production may be further changed according to the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the set number counter). In this case, regarding a series of story productions, a summary may be displayed for other parts than the part already performed in the ST mode story section, and the summary may be displayed for the already performed part in the ST mode story section. For the other parts, the story that should have been performed by the series of story production may be displayed as it is. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to display the summary of the story according to the degree of progress of the story in the series of story productions. According to the present embodiment, in the case where a series of story productions progresses in accordance with the number of large-scale condominiums in the special game state (for example, ST mode) (for example, the value of the ST middle-period condominium counter), the next series Related story effects in a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) can be performed with the effect contents of the story effect and effect contents that do not cause discrepancies.

Further, for example, according to the value of the ST management counter (or the value of the set number counter), the display contents of the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) are further displayed. It may be different. In this case, regarding a series of story effects, a story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) corresponding to other portions than the portion already performed in the ST mode story section is set. It may be displayed, and for a portion already performed in the story section of ST mode, a window image (second image) corresponding to the portion and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) are displayed, For other parts, the story that should have been performed by a series of story productions may be displayed as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display the window image (second image) and the story corresponding to the window image (second image) according to the degree of progress of the story in the series of story productions. According to the present embodiment, in the case where a series of story productions progresses in accordance with the number of large-scale condominiums in the special game state (for example, ST mode) (for example, the value of the ST middle-period condominium counter), the next series The related story effect in a specific game state (for example, SP bonus) can be performed with the effect content of the story effect and effect content that does not cause a discrepancy, and a window image (second image) used in a series of story effects can be displayed. Since it is also used in the related story production, it is possible to reduce the production image data and secure a larger storage area.

[Screen display example of story production pattern during ST]
102 to 110 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the story effect pattern during ST. 102 to FIG. 110, the effect contents in the basic effect time (10 s) corresponding to one set (5 special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode are shown. The display area 4A, the set story display area 703 (first image display means), and the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. 99. Therefore, the reference numerals are omitted in FIGS. 102 to 110. Further, for convenience of description, the first reserved quantity information 701 and the second reserved quantity information 702 are omitted in FIGS. 102 to 110.

In FIG. 102, in any game from the first variation to the fifth variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a miss, and the first variation time corresponds to the first variation time (for example, 2 s). It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern in ST in a predetermined 1 set, when a fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern which shows shortening fluctuation) is determined. The remaining effect time is calculated based on the above-mentioned basic effect time (10 s) and the value of the ST management counter (or the value of the in-set counter) (see FIG. 84), and is set in the set (1 /5 to 5/5) indicates how many times the game is in one set. The same applies to FIGS. 103 to 110. In FIG. 102, since the remaining production time and the variation time are synchronized, a series of story productions in a predetermined one set is to proceed based on the basic production time.

In FIG. 103, in the game of the first variation and the second variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the above-mentioned first variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first variation time is the variation pattern. In the third variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern is a second variation time (eg, 6 s) longer than the first variation time (eg, 2 s) described above. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a screen display example of a story production pattern during ST in a predetermined one set when a second variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern indicating normal reach) corresponding to is determined. In FIG. 103, since the remaining effect time and the variable time are synchronized, a series of story effects in a predetermined one set progress based on the basic effect time, and based on the big hit notification effect data at the end of the predetermined one set. A big hit announcement production will be performed.

In FIG. 104, in the game of the first variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is lost, and the above-mentioned first variation pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned first variation time is determined as the variation pattern, and 2 In the variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern corresponds to the second variation time (eg, 6 s) longer than the first variation time (eg, 2 s) described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST in a predetermined 1 set, when the 2 fluctuation patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern which shows normal reach A) are determined. In FIG. 104, since the remaining effect time is longer than the fluctuation time, the second effect (2) in the set among the effect in the set in the predetermined one set (the portion corresponding to the predetermined one set in the series of story effects). /5) to 5th (5/5), the production within the set is advanced so that the remaining production time and the variation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect that is normally performed for 8 s as the remaining effect time is advanced in 6 s so that the remaining part of the in-set effect ends. It should be noted that various modes can be adopted as the mode in which the remaining portion of the effect within the set is advanced. For example, control that changes the reproduction speed (that is, performs fast-forward reproduction) so that the reproduction time is 6 s when the image data (video data) related to the remaining part of the effect within the set is originally reproduced for 8 s. May be performed, and control for changing the frame rate (that is, performing thinned-out reproduction) may be performed. Further, these changed image data (video data) may be stored in advance. The same applies to FIGS. 106 and 110.

105 and 106, in the game of the first variation to the third variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the variation pattern corresponds to the first variation time described above. The variation pattern is determined, and in the fourth variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern is the second variation time (for example, 2 s) longer than the first variation time (for example, 2 s) described above. 10 s) and a second variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern indicating normal reach B) has been determined, the ST in the predetermined one set and the next one set (next set) subsequent to the predetermined one set It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of a story production pattern. In FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the variation time is longer than the remaining effect time, so that the in-set effect in one predetermined set is performed according to the basic effect time and a series of story effects proceed. Here, the possible production time is calculated based on the second variation time (for example, 10 s) and the remaining production time (for example, 4 s which is the remaining production time for the fourth variation) (see FIG. 84). In the screen display examples shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the possible production time is 6 s. Further, since the possible production time is 6 seconds, the production end target set is the next set. Regarding the in-set effect in the next set, of the in-set effect in the next set (the portion corresponding to the next set in the series of story effects), the first time (1/5) to the fifth time (5/5) in the set. ), the production in the set is advanced so that the possible production time and the variation time are synchronized with each other. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is originally set to proceed so that the remaining part of the in-set effect that is performed over 10 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s.

107 to 110, in the game of the first variation to the third variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is lost, and the variation pattern corresponds to the first variation time described above. The variation pattern is determined, and in the fourth variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern is the second variation time (eg, 2 s) longer than the first variation time (eg, 2 s) described above. , 30 s) and a second variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern indicating super reach) has been determined, a predetermined one set, a next one set following the predetermined one set, and a next one set. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the story production pattern in ST in 1 set after 2 sets, and 1 set after 3 sets following 1 set after 2 sets (after the 3rd set). In FIGS. 107 to 110, since the variation time is longer than the remaining effect time, the in-set effect in one predetermined set is performed according to the basic effect time and a series of story effects proceed. Further, in the screen display examples shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, since the possible production time is 26 s, the production end target set is 3 sets later, and the basic production time is also set for the next set and the production in the set after 2 sets. A series of story productions will proceed as follows. Regarding the in-set effect after 3 sets, of the in-set effect after 3 sets (the portion corresponding to after 3 sets in a series of story effects), the first time (1/5) to the 5th time (5) For the portion corresponding to /5), the in-set effect is advanced so that the effectable time and the variation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is originally set to proceed so that the remaining part of the in-set effect that is performed over 10 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s.

In addition, in FIG. 107 to FIG. 110, among the in-set effects in one predetermined set, the effect ends from the portion corresponding to the fifth time (5/5) in the set to the next set and in-set effects after the second set. A window image suggesting an in-set effect after the third set, which is a target set, is displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) in a special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST. Has become. Specifically, the window image that suggests the in-set effect after the third set, which is the effect end target set, is displayed by highlighting, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode. The display mode different from the normal display mode is not limited to this, and the outer frame of the window image may have a different display mode from the normal mode. In the window image, a semi-transparent image indicating a big hit ( For example, the character V) may be displayed. Further, the special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST is not limited to displaying the window image in a display mode different from the normal mode, and a story image to be displayed in the set story display area 703 (first image display means) is displayed. It may be displayed in a display mode different from usual.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of advancing a series of story production with a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) as one set in a predetermined section in the special game state (for example, a story section of ST mode). , A time obtained by multiplying the first variation time (for example, 2 s) by a predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set) is set as a basic effect time (for example, 10 s), and the number of sets is based on the basic effect time. Progress the story corresponding to. If the variation pattern determined when the big hit is the second variation pattern corresponding to the second variation time (for example, 30 s) longer than the first variation time, within one set The remaining effect time is calculated based on the number of games in the game and the basic effect time, and when the second variation time is longer than the remaining effect time, the effect end target set after the next set is special. By suggesting a production mode (for example, a production mode in which a window image that suggests an in-set production of a production end target set is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display), a specific game state (for example, SP It is configured to notify that the bonus will be transferred.

With such a configuration, it is possible to roughly synchronize the production time of a series of story productions executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol with one set as one unit with a simple configuration. In addition, even if it is decided that it will be a jackpot, a series of story productions will proceed as inconsistently as possible, and a jackpot notice (specific game It is possible to make a notice of transition to the state).

Further, in the present embodiment, the second variation time of the portion corresponding to the number of sets which is the target suggested by the special effect mode in the series of story effects (for example, the effect within the set of the effect end target set) It is configured to advance the story in sync with the end. With such a configuration, it is possible to synchronize a plurality of sets of production time and a variation time of the identification symbol in a series of story production, and it is possible to perform a series of story production and a big hit notice in a more comfortable manner. Becomes

In addition, in the present embodiment, the window image (second image) corresponding to the number of sets that is the target of the special presentation mode in the series of story productions is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode. It is configured. With such a configuration, by using the window image (second image) that suggests the story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward, a big hit announcement (transition to a specific game state) that will be more interesting It is possible to make a notice).

[Screen display example of item prefetching effect]
111 to 113 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the item prefetching effect. The upper left part of FIG. 111 shows an image display example in the case where the effect image showing that the plate A is acquired is displayed in the display area 4A before the change, and the upper right part of FIG. In Fig. 111, an example of image display in the case where an effect image showing that the plate B is acquired is displayed in the display area 4A is shown. In the lower left of Fig. 111, the plate C is acquired before the change. 111 shows an example of image display in the case where the effect image showing "is displayed in the display area 4A. In the lower right part of FIG. 111, the effect image showing that the plate D is acquired in the display area 4A before the change. The example of an image display in the case of being displayed is shown.

In the effect image showing that the plate A has been acquired, the expectation type associated with the plate A together with the image of the plate A is shown to be the pseudo continuous effect, and shows that the plate B has been acquired. In the effect image, it is shown that the expectation type associated with the plate B is the serif effect together with the image of the plate B, and in the effect image showing that the plate C is acquired, the image of the plate C is added to the plate C. It is shown that the kind of the degree of expectation associated with is the cut-in effect, and in the effect image showing that the plate D is acquired, the expectation degree is increased by acquiring the plate D together with the image of the plate D. It has been shown to be higher. As described above, before the change, the degree of expectation that the type of the acquired plate (item) is associated with the plate (item) according to the processing result of the item acquisition effect processing (see FIG. 90). It will be notified together with the type.

FIG. 112 shows a case where the number of pseudo runs in the item prefetch effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89) is “1” (that is, the pseudo run is executed once). It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of. 112A shows the variation start of the decorative pattern 700, FIG. 112B shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the normal temporary stop, and FIG. 112C shows the use of the plate A. It shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of, (d) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo continuous temporary stop, (e) is from the pseudo temporary stop decorative pattern 700. Indicates that the fluctuation starts again, and (f) indicates that the decorative pattern 700 is stopped and displayed in the reach state.

In the change of the item prefetch effect shown in FIG. 112, first, as shown in (a), the variable display of the decorative pattern 700 is started in the normal change mode. Here, for example, when the plate A is acquired and it is not informed that the plate A is acquired before the change, an effect image similar to the effect image shown in the upper left of FIG. It is informed that the plate A has been acquired (see S491 in FIG. 86). Next, when one plate A is acquired, as shown in (b), only one plate A is more than the expected degree (pseudo consecutive times) predetermined as the expectation degree of the pseudo continuous production. After the effect display of normal temporary stop with low expectation (indicating that the pseudo continuous 0 times is performed), as shown in (c), the effect display of using the plate A is performed, and based on this plate A, ( As shown in d) and (e), the effect display of the pseudo continuous temporary stop and the re-variation start is performed according to the predetermined degree of expectation (pseudo continuous once). Then, as shown in (f), whether or not the reach state is reached and the big hit is finally given is notified. On the other hand, when the plate A has not been acquired, as shown in (d) and (e), the effects of the pseudo continuous temporary stop and the re-variation start are produced according to the predetermined degree of expectation (pseudo continuous once). The display is done. Then, as shown in (f), whether or not the reach state is reached and the big hit is finally given is notified.

FIG. 113 shows a case where the number of pseudo stations in the item prefetch effect (more specifically, the item use effect processing shown in FIGS. 86 to 89) is “3” (that is, the pseudo station is executed three times). It is a diagram showing an example of a screen display when two plates A are acquired. Since (a) to (f) of FIG. 113 are the same as those shown in FIG. 112, the display contents of the screen are omitted in FIG. 113.

Even in the variation of the item prefetch effect shown in FIG. 113, first, as shown in (a), the variable display of the decorative pattern 700 is started in the normal variation mode. Here, since the pseudo continuous number is “3” and the number of the plate A is 2, the plate is used in the first pseudo continuous so that the plate A is used in the pseudo continuous production in the latter half of the variation. A is not used. Therefore, the effect display of (d) pseudo continuous suspension and (e) start of re-variation is performed, and the first pseudo continuous is finished. Next, since the number of pseudo stations is "2" and the number of plates A is two, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) plate A used, (d) pseudo continuous stop, and (e) re-variation. The effect display of the start is performed and the second pseudo-repeating ends. Next, since the number of pseudo stations is "1" and the number of plates A is two, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) use of plate A, (d) pseudo temporary stop, and (e) re-variation. The effect display of the start is performed, the third pseudo-repeating is finished, the effect display of (f) reach is performed, and it is notified whether or not the big hit is finally made.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of the predetermined items (for example, the plate A) defined in the item prefetching effect is 0, the predetermined expectation type (for example, the pseudo-relationship) corresponding to the predetermined item is set. A predetermined effect (for example, (d) pseudo continuous stop and (e) re-variation start effect display) in which a predetermined expectation degree is notified as an expectation degree (for example, the number of pseudo stations) of the effect). And the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) defined in the item prefetching effect is 1 or more, the expected degree of a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo continuous production) corresponding to the predetermined item. (For example, (b) a normal temporary stop effect display is performed) after a predetermined number of items lower than the predetermined expectation level (for example, the pseudo number) is notified A predetermined degree of expectation is notified based on the item (for example, based on (c) the effect display of using the plate A is performed (for example, (d) pseudo continuous suspension and (e) re-execution). The effect display of the fluctuation start is performed). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a more varied jackpot announcement (announcement of transition to a specific gaming state).

[Modification of this embodiment]
Next, modified examples of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. In addition, in each of the following modifications, each processing in the present embodiment is performed in the same manner, unless otherwise specified.

<Hit effect pattern determination table (modification)>
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table according to the present modification. In the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, the kind of hit effect pattern to be determined is defined according to the lottery value for each kind of hit pattern. In the table (modification), the types of winning effect patterns determined according to the winning rate are further defined. The determination of the winning rate may be performed by the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71.

The winning rate is, for example, a game won in the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, or the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D in a predetermined period. It can be calculated from the number of balls, or the number of game balls won in a predetermined number as a combination thereof. Further, the predetermined period is, for example, a certain period in the non-probable variation/non-time saving game state, a certain period in the non-probability variation/time saving game state, a certain period in the certain variation/time saving game state, or a certain period in the jackpot gaming state (specific game state). , Or a predetermined period as a combination thereof can be set. In this modified example, as an example of the winning rate, it is required for a specific first round game (for example, 1R) in the number of gaming balls won in the first special winning opening 36/big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). The winning rate will be calculated from the time. For example, if the number of game balls that have won the first big winning opening 36 is 9 and the time required for a specific first round game in the big hit game state (specific game state) is 18 s, the prize per 1 s The rate is 50%. Here, the threshold value of the winning rate can be appropriately set, but in the present modification, the threshold value of the winning rate of 50% is taken as an example of the threshold value. In the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example) shown in FIG. 114, the description of the hit effect pattern corresponding to the story bonus and the hit effect pattern corresponding to the battle bonus are omitted for convenience of description. ..

As shown in FIG. 114, in the hit effect pattern determination table (modification), as in the hit effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Success), a music pattern A (reverse) that constitutes the success of the live bonus 5R, a music pattern A (failure) that constitutes the failure of the live bonus 8R, and the failure of the live bonus 4R. Regarding the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (success) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold. Is stipulated. Regarding the music pattern A (reverse), the music pattern A (reverse) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (reverse) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold. Is stipulated. Regarding the music pattern A (failure), the music pattern A (failure) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (failure) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold. Is stipulated. Here, "long" indicates a hit production pattern in which the production time (for example, the time when the musical composition pattern A is output) is set to a relatively long time, and "short" indicates the production time. Shows a hit effect pattern set for a relatively short time. That is, in this modification, the music pattern A (successful) long and the music pattern A (successful) short together constitute the live bonus 9R success, but the time when the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output in the live bonus. Is a hit effect pattern that is configured to be different.

Similarly, regarding the music pattern B (success), the music pattern B (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern B (success) selected when the winning rate is equal to or more than the threshold. For the music pattern B (reverse) with a short defined, a music pattern B (reverse) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and a music pattern B (selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold. Reverse) Short is defined, and for song pattern B (failure), song pattern B (failure) long is selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and song pattern selected when the win rate is greater than or equal to the threshold. B (failure) shorts are defined. Similarly, regarding the music pattern C (determined), the music pattern C (determined) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern C (selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold. (Confirmed) Short is defined.

Here, the winning rate can be an indicator of whether or not the player is actively shooting a game ball using the launching device 26 (that is, whether or not the player is actively playing the game). Therefore, when the player is active in the game, for example, the music pattern A (success) short is selected as the winning effect pattern, and when the player is not active in the game, for example, By configuring so that the music pattern A (success) long is selected as the hit effect pattern, the effect of the big hit game state (specific game state) that matches the tendency of the player's game (speed of progress of the game) is performed. At the same time, it is possible to more easily synchronize the end of the output of the music by the music pattern and the end of the big hit game state (specific game state).

Various methods can be used as the method of changing the output time in the same hit effect pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)). For example, the music pattern A (success) long configures each section as shown in the upper part of FIG. 94, and the music pattern A (success) short configures one or more sections of each section. The time may be shortened, or the interval in which no output is made may be defined. Further, as a method of shortening the effect time, the tempo of the music corresponding to the music pattern may be increased, or the arranged music may be output.

Further, various timings can be adopted as the timing for determining the winning rate. For example, in the above-described example, the winning rate in the big hit game state (specific game state) that has shifted to immediately before the big hit game state (specific game state) in which the live bonus is to be performed this time may be determined. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is updated every time the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is reached. In addition, the winning rate from the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine or the time of recovery from a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error indicating that the front frame 3 or the protective glass 7 has been opened, a backup error of the work RAM 73, etc.) The average value may be calculated. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is cleared when the gaming machine is cut off or when a predetermined error occurs.

Further, in the above example, when calculating the winning rate, the number of game balls that have won the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37/gambling balls that have been launched in the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) The winning rate may be obtained from the number of. Also in this case, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the player is active in the game.

<Story production table group>
FIG. 115 is a conceptual diagram showing a story effect table group of this modification. In the present embodiment, a series of story effects are performed in the ST mode story section, and when the ST mode story section is shifted to the SP bonus, the related story effects related to the series of story effects in the SP bonus are performed. Although it was supposed to be performed, in this modified example, the production related to a specific story is performed in all the production modes (game states), and the story is configured to proceed in units of a specific story.

For example, when the specific story is the first story, in the normal mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the first story corresponding normal mode effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the normal mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect that introduces the character appearing in the first story. In the short mode of the time saving mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the first story corresponding short mode in-time production pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. Also, in the long mode of the time saving mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the first story corresponding long mode intermediate effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the time saving mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to the effect in which the background image related to the first story is displayed. Further, during the first special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined by referring to the first story corresponding hit effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. As a result, in the live bonus, the music patterns related to the first story can be selected, in the story bonus, the story patterns related to the first story can be selected, and in the battle bonus, the battle related to the first story can be selected. The pattern can be selected. Also, during the second special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined by referring to the SP story hit effect pattern determination table for the first story corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the SP bonus, the production mode before the transition is related to the first story depending on whether it is the time saving mode, the ST mode story section, or the ST mode battle reach section. The hit performance pattern can be selected. In the ST mode, the first story-corresponding ST mode intermediate production pattern determination table corresponding to the first story is referred to, and is related to the first story depending on whether it is the story section or the battle reach section. It is possible to select the effect pattern to be performed. The same applies when the specific story is the second story or the third story.

In addition, the production related to the second story is performed from the first production control state in which the production related to the first story is performed (that is, each production pattern is selected from the first story production table group). A condition related to the third story is performed from the transition condition to the second effect control state, which is a state in which it is turned off (that is, a state in which each effect pattern is selected from the second story effect table group) and the second effect control state. Various conditions can be adopted as a transition condition to the third effect control state, which is a state (that is, a state where each effect pattern is selected from the third story effect table group). As an example, for example, a big hit in the normal mode of the first effect control state, in the case of V winning during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect even in the ST mode to be transferred thereafter The control state is continued, and transition to the second effect control state is made with the termination of the ST mode as a transition condition. In addition, when the non-V winning is achieved during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time saving mode to be changed thereafter, and the end of the time saving mode is set as the transition condition. , The second effect control state. Alternatively, the transition to the second effect control state may be made with the transition condition being that the non-V winning is achieved during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state. That is, at the end of a specific game state (for example, during the first special symbol hit), a special game state (for example, ST mode), or a time saving game state (for example, time saving mode), which is a game state that is advantageous for the player, It can be configured to shift the production control state (first to third production control state). With such a configuration, even if the advantageous state for the player is over, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game by advancing a specific story.

Also, as another example, a big hit in the normal mode of the first effect control state, transition to the second effect control state, with the transition condition being V winning during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state. Then, when the non-V winning is achieved during the first special symbol hit in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time saving mode to be shifted thereafter. Alternatively, the big effect in the normal mode of the first effect control state may be a transition condition, and the state may be changed to the second effect control state. That is, during the transition to the specific game state (for example, the first special symbol hitting) or the special game state (for example, the ST mode) that is a game state advantageous to the player, each effect control state (first to third effect) It can be configured to shift the control state). With such a configuration, when the player shifts to an advantageous state, a specific story progresses, so that the player's motivation for playing can be increased.

Note that various conditions can be adopted as the initialization condition for shifting the effect control state to the initial control state (for example, the first effect control state). For example, the initialization condition may be that the gaming machine is cut off or the above-mentioned predetermined error occurs, and the demo display is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 for a predetermined time or more (for example, 30 minutes or more). ) The continuation may be used as the initialization condition.

<Main fluctuation time determination table (modified example)>
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a main variation time determination table of this modification. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 performs the ST mode processing (see FIG. 83) and the ST story effect pattern change processing (see FIG. 84) to determine the main CPU 61 in the ST mode story section. The variation pattern (the end timing of the variation time of the identification pattern) and the end of the in-set effect in the series of story effects were synchronized, but in the present modification, the main CPU 61 further determines the end of the in-set effect. It is configured to determine a variation pattern to be synchronized (end timing of variation time of the identification symbol). Although the detailed description of the main fluctuation time determination table is omitted in the present embodiment, a main fluctuation time determination table similar to that shown in FIG. 116 may be adopted, and a part or all of it is different. A main fluctuation time determination table may be adopted.

In the main variation time determination table (modification) shown in FIG. 116, the result of the big hit determination (winning), the current game state (non-probability variation/non-time saving, non-probability variation/time saving, probability variation/time saving), and reach determination random number The range (0 to 250) and the effect selection random number range (0 to 99) and other types of variable patterns that are determined according to various parameters are defined, and the game state is changed to a certainty/time saving game state ( In the ST game state), the number of games is "1 to 50 times" (is it a ST mode story section) or is "51 to 180 times" (ST mode battle reach section) Different types of fluctuation patterns are defined. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, a different variation pattern type is further defined according to the value of the in-set counter. Note that, in the present embodiment, the case where the in-set counter is provided in the work RAM 73 and is counted by the sub CPU 71 has been described, but in the present modification, an in-set counter is further provided in the main RAM 63. It is assumed that the number of games in the set is counted by the main CPU 61. In addition, the number of games played in the probability variation/shortened time gaming state (ST gaming state) may be obtained from the value of the probability variation number counter. Further, an ST management counter is also provided in the main RAM 63 and is controlled by the main CPU 61. The number of games played may be counted.

The reach determination random number range defines a reach determination random number that determines the reach variation time, or defines a range of the reach determination random number that does not determine the reach variation time. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start opening 32 or the second start opening 33 in each game state. The random number range for effect selection defines a range of random numbers for reach determination, a variation time, and a range of random numbers for effect selection corresponding to effect contents. The effect selection random number value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33 in each game state.

In the hit effect pattern determination table (modified example) shown in FIG. 116, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a selection pattern of 96/100 and a variation pattern of “02H” are set. Is selected, and “03H” is selected as the variation pattern with a selectivity of 4/100. The variation pattern “02H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is the shortened variation A. Further, the variation pattern “03H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the shortened variation B. Here, the variation pattern “02H” corresponds to the above-described first variation pattern corresponding to a specific variation time (for example, 2 s), and is determined with high probability in the ST mode story section. .. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the variation pattern “02H” may be always selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, and the value of the in-set counter is “1” (that is, the first game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "07H" is selected as a fluctuation pattern, "04H" is selected as a fluctuation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100, and "05H" is selected as a fluctuation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100. To be done. The variation pattern “07H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 10,000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is the special variation A. The variation pattern “04H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is super reach A. The variation pattern “05H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 30,000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is super reach B. Here, the variation pattern “07H” corresponds to the above-mentioned second variation pattern different from the above-mentioned first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "1", the variation pattern "07H" may be always selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, and the value of the in-set counter is “2” (that is, the second game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "08H" is selected as a variation pattern, "04H" is selected as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100, and "05H" is selected as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100. To be done. The variation pattern “08H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8000 ms (8 s) and the effect content is the special variation B. Here, similarly to the above, the variation pattern “08H” corresponds to the above-mentioned second variation pattern different from the above-mentioned first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the ST mode story section. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "2", the variation pattern "08H" may be always selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, and the value of the in-set counter is “3” (that is, the third game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "09H" is selected as a fluctuation pattern, "04H" is selected as a fluctuation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100, and "05H" is selected as a fluctuation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100. To be done. The variation pattern “09H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 6000 ms (6 s) and the effect content is the special variation C. Here, similarly to the above, the variation pattern “09H” corresponds to the above-described second variation pattern different from the above-described first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the ST mode story section. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, and the value of the in-set counter is "3", the variation pattern "09H" may be always selected.

Further, for example, in the story section of ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, and the value of the in-set counter is “4” (that is, the fourth game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "0AH" is selected as a variation pattern, "04H" is selected as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100, and "05H" is selected as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100. To be done. The variation pattern “0AH” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the special variation D. Here, similarly to the above, the variation pattern “0AH” corresponds to the above-mentioned second variation pattern different from the above-mentioned first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the ST mode story section. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "4", the variation pattern "0AH" may be always selected.

In addition, for example, in the story section of ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, and the value of the in-set counter is “5” (that is, the fifth game in one set), With a selectivity of 96/100, "0BH" is selected as a variation pattern, "04H" is selected as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100, and "05H" is selected as a variation pattern with a selectivity of 2/100. To be done. The variation pattern “0BH” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the effect content is the special variation E. Here, similarly to the above, the variation pattern “0BH” corresponds to the above-mentioned second variation pattern different from the above-mentioned first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the ST mode story section. ing. However, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit and the value of the in-set counter is "5", the variation pattern "0BH" may be always selected.

As described above, in the present modification, the second variation pattern is determined based on the value of the in-set counter, but as described above, the value of the in-set counter is "1". In some cases, the remaining effect time in the one set is 10 s, and when the value of the in-set counter is “2”, the remaining effect time in the one set is 8 s, When the value of the counter is "3", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set is 6 s, and when the value of the counter in the set is "4", the above-mentioned remaining effect time in the one set. The time is 4 s, and when the value of the in-set counter is “5”, the above-mentioned remaining effect time in that one set is 2 s. That is, in this modification, the variation time is synchronized with the end of a predetermined effect (in-set effect) by determining the variation pattern using the hit effect pattern determination table (modification example) shown in FIG. Is configured to be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the effect time of a predetermined effect (for example, effect within a set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machine can be provided.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming board) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start port 32, second start port 33), and a first variable winning device (for example, a first mode which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium (for example, A first special winning opening 36) and a first area which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium, and a specific area through which the game medium can pass (for example, , A second variable winning device (for example, the second special winning opening 37) having a specific area 38A), and a specific game state advantageous to the player (for example, the second winning hole 37) and the game medium having passed through the starting area. , A specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to the big hit gaming state, and a determination result indicating that the specific gaming state transition determination means determines the transition to the specific gaming state. On the condition that the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific region in the specific game state, the specific game After the state is finished, the special game state is controlled to a special game state (for example, a probability variation/time saving game state) in which it is relatively easy to obtain a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means transitions to the specific game state. With the control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and the specific game state, the first round game execution means capable of executing the first round game for varying the first variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times ( For example, in the specific game state with the main CPU 61), a second round game executing means (for example, a main game execution means) capable of executing a second round game for changing the second variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode for a predetermined number of times. CPU 61), music pattern selection means (for example, sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state is controlled by the specific game state control means, and the music pattern selection A game machine provided with a music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music according to a music pattern selected by a means in the special game state, wherein the second round game execution means is the first During the execution of the 2-round game, the passage of the game medium to the specific area is relatively It is possible to easily perform a specific second round game, and the specific game state is a first specific number of times (for example, four times of 1 to 4R) of the first round game by the first round game executing means. After the execution of the second round game execution means, at least one specific second round game is executed in a first specific game state (for example, a big hit game state according to a hit pattern 3), and A second specific game state (for example, a hit pattern) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution unit after the first specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution unit. 8 big hit game state), and the music pattern selection means, when the specific game state control means is controlled to the first specific game state, a first music pattern (for example, a music pattern) A (reverse rotation)) can be selected, and a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected when the specific game state control means controls the second specific game state. In the first music pattern, the music output means outputs a first common portion of a predetermined music (for example, A melody of the first section), and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section). It is a predetermined music pattern that a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) is output after the passage, and the second music pattern is the predetermined music output means. Is a predetermined music pattern that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the first common portion of the music is output and the predetermined branch period has elapsed, and the music output means Regardless of which of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, at a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time before the start of the first round when the initial section is started). The output of the predetermined music is started from the predetermined second time, and when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. The game machine is characterized in that the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, gaming board 1) through which the gaming medium can pass (for example, , A first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) and a first mode which is provided in the game area and is easy to accept the game medium and a second mode which is difficult to accept the game medium, and the game medium passes through. It is advantageous to the player on the condition that the variable winning device (for example, the special winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) therein and the game medium have passed through the starting area. A specific game state transition determining means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state), and a purport that the specific game state transition is performed by the specific game state transition determining means. On condition that the determination result of is obtained, a specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and that the game medium has passed through the specific region in the specific game state. As a condition, after the particular game state is finished, a special game state (for example, a probability variation/time saving game state) in which it is relatively easy to obtain a determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state. Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the first variable winning device in the specific game state and the first mode and the second mode, while passing the game medium to the specific region First round game executing means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of executing a first round game which is relatively difficult to perform a predetermined number of times, and the second variable winning device in the first and second modes in the specific game state. A second round game executing means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing a specific second round game for a predetermined number of times, which makes it relatively easy to pass the game medium to the specific area, while changing the mode, and the specific game. A music pattern selection unit (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the state control unit controls the specific game state, and a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection unit And a music output unit (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to the above in the special game state, wherein the specific game state is the first specific number of times by the first round game execution unit. (For example, 1 to 4R four times) the first round game After being executed, a first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed at least once by the second round game executing means (for example, a big hit game state according to a hit pattern 3), and the first A second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means after the first specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the round game executing means (for example, hit pattern 8). The big hit game state according to), and the music pattern selection means, when the specific game state control means is controlled to the first specific game state, a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (Reverse rotation)), and a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected when the specific game state control means controls the second specific game state. In the first music pattern, the music output means outputs the first common part of the predetermined music (for example, A melody of the first section), and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) elapses. Is a predetermined music pattern that a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) is output after the above, and the second music pattern is the predetermined music pattern output by the music output means. It is a predetermined music pattern that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the first common portion of the music is output and the predetermined branch period has elapsed, and the music output means is Regardless of which of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, from a predetermined time (for example, during the waiting time before the start of the first round when the initial section starts) The output of the predetermined music is started, and at the predetermined time, when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the second round game execution means performs the specific second round game. A game machine characterized in that it is a time when output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before execution is started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music (for example, in the first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed) and in the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed (for example, The first common part (for example, A melody of the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Then, in the first specific game state, after the lapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific portion of the predetermined song (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) indicating that the specific second round game is executed is output. .. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the specific game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music is started at a predetermined time (for example, the initial section). Since it is configured such that the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro in the initial section) is started from the waiting time before the start of the first R) in which is started, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific game state is the second specific number of times (e.g., 8 times 1 to 8R), which is larger than the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means. After the first round game is executed, at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means in a third specific game state (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 1). , A fourth specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means after the second specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game executing means (for example, , A big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), and the music pattern selection means, when the specific game state control means is controlled to the third specific game state, a third music pattern (for example, , A music pattern A (success) can be selected, and a fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) is selected when the specific game state control means controls the fourth specific game state. The third music pattern is selectable, and after the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means and the predetermined branch period has elapsed, the third music pattern is further selected. Two common parts (for example, B melody of the second section) are output, and after a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) has elapsed, the specific part of the predetermined music (for example, the chorus of the third section). ) Is a predetermined music pattern, and the fourth music pattern outputs the first common portion of the predetermined music by the music output means, and the predetermined branch period elapses. After that, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output, and the predetermined part of the predetermined music is not output after the specific branch period has elapsed is a predetermined music pattern. The music output means starts outputting the predetermined music from the predetermined time regardless of which of the third music pattern and the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. , The predetermined time, when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means, The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is a time when output of the specific portion of a predetermined music can be started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific game states, the first common part (for example, the first section of the predetermined music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A)) A melody) is output and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is made to elapse. Here, in the first specific game state, a specific portion (for example, reverse of the fifth section) of a predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the predetermined branch period has elapsed is output. However, in the third specific game state or the fourth game state, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch section). ) Is passed. Then, in the third specific game state, after the lapse of the specific branch period, a specific portion of a predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed (for example, the chorus of the third section) is output. .. With this configuration, the player's expectation in the specific game state can be further increased.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupied when the music pattern selection unit selects either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected. The degree of expectation that the third musical piece pattern occupies when the third musical piece pattern or the fourth musical piece pattern is selected by the musical piece pattern selecting means is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described above, which is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupying when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18+17=35/200) is selected. The third music pattern occupying in the case where either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46+16=62/200) rather than the degree of expectation (for example, 18/35) is selected. By configuring the expectation level (for example, 46/62) to be high, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is passed after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section). ) Is output, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game will be executed is relatively high, so the roles of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified, and It is possible to further enhance the player's expectation in the gaming state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and the music pattern selecting unit selects a music pattern corresponding to the first music. In the case, when the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means, rather than the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means, The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means is higher.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific second round game when the music pattern (for example, the music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A) is selected. To the second music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern B) rather than the expected degree (for example, the rate at which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected). The degree of expectation that the specific second round game will be executed when the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected (for example, when the music pattern B is selected, the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined). It is possible to change the degree of expectation between pieces of music by further increasing the percentage of the player's tune), thereby further enhancing the player's expectation in the specific game state.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming board) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start opening 32, a second start opening 33), and a variable winning device (for example, the first start provided in the game area, which can be changed into a first mode in which it is easy to receive a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to receive a game medium) A special winning opening 36, a second special winning opening 37), a start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and the start memory information. On condition that the starting memory information is stored by the storage means, it is determined whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when the variable winning device is changed. Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61), identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display section 53, second special symbol display section 54) that variably displays identification information, and the specific game state transition A variation pattern determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines a variation pattern of the identification information that is variably displayed by the identification information display means according to the determination result by the determination means, and the identification by the specific game state transition determination means. On the condition that the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information, which has been determined to be shifted to the game state, is stopped and displayed by the identification information display means, A specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to a specific game state, and a plurality of types of items (for example, plates A to D) each have a plurality of expected degree types (for example, pseudo continuous production, dialogue production, cut-in). Expectation of whether or not a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determining means transitions to the specific game state is obtained by displaying the item in correspondence with the production and other promotion (reverse) production. Item effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 71) for executing an item effect (for example, item prefetch effect) for notifying the degree, and item effect control means (for controlling the progress of the item effect executed by the item effect execution means ( For example, the sub CPU 71) is provided, and the item effect control means determines whether or not to execute the item effect according to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means, thereby performing the item effect. If you do The item effect contents (for example, item prefetch effects 1 to 24) to be executed are determined from among a plurality of item effect contents in which the number of each of several types of items and the expectation level of each of the plurality of expected degree types are defined. If the number of predetermined items (for example, plate B) defined in the decided item effect contents is 0, the degree of expectation of a predetermined expectation type (for example, dialogue effect) corresponding to the predetermined item. As a result, the item effect execution means is caused to execute a predetermined effect (for example, effect display based on the serif effect data) in which a predetermined degree of expectation (for example, dialogue (red)) is notified (for example, FIG. 86). If the number of the predetermined items specified in the determined item effect content is 1 or more, the expected degree of the predetermined expectation type corresponding to the predetermined item is determined as the expected degree. After the expected degree lower than the predetermined expected degree by the number of the predetermined items (for example, serif (green)) is notified, the predetermined expected degree is notified based on the predetermined item. A game machine characterized by causing the item effect executing means to execute the predetermined effect (for example, the processing shown in S498 of Fig. 86).

According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to give a more varied jackpot notification (notice of transition to a specific gaming state).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the item effect control means, when executing the item effect, obtains a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means transitions to the specific game state. The variable display of the identification information corresponding to the starting stored information that has become is the item defined in the determined item effect content before the identification information display means starts (for example, before the variation). It is possible to notify the type of the item by the item prior notification determining unit including the item prior notification determining unit (for example, the item acquisition effect processing by the sub CPU 71 shown in FIG. 90) for determining whether or not to notify the type. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the item effect executing means is caused to execute a preliminary notification effect in which the type of the item is notified when determined.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when giving a big hit announcement (notice of transition to a specific game state), a more varied look-ahead effect (effect based on start memory before variation execution) can be performed. It will be possible.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern determining means is the specific game when the starting memory information storage means stores a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the starting memory information. When the state transition determination means has not obtained a determination result indicating that the transition to the specific game state has occurred, a specific variation time (eg, 2000 ms) with a variation time shorter than the normal variation time (eg, 4000 ms) When a specific variation pattern associated (for example, a special symbol variation pattern for performing a shortened variation) is determined, and the advance notification determination means determines the specific variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means ( For example, when the determination result of S483 in FIG. 85 is YES), it is not determined whether or not to notify the item type defined in the item effect content determined by the item effect content determination unit. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when an item effect (for example, item prefetch effect) is executed, the effect balance may be lost due to the relationship with the change time (especially, shortening change). Can be prevented.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming board) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start opening 32, a second start opening 33), and a variable winning device (for example, the first start provided in the game area, which can be changed into a first mode in which it is easy to receive a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to receive a game medium) The special winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37), and the variable winning device is changed on the condition that the game medium has passed through the starting area, and a specific game state advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device (for example, a big hit game). The specific game state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to the state), and the determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determining means transitions to the specific game state are obtained. In particular, a specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and a predetermined start condition are satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state). , A special game state advantageous for a player different from the specific game state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, 180 special symbol games are exhausted) after the specific game state is finished (for example, , ST game state) and a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and a game number counting means (for example, a game number counting means for counting the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, ST mode story section) in the special game state) , ST management counter), and a specific game state number counting means (for example, ST medium game counter) that counts the number of times the specific game state control means controls the specific game state in the special game state, Based on the count result by the game number counting means and the count result by the specific game state number counting means, a series of story effects are executed in the predetermined section, and are related to the series of story effects in the specific game state. Story production execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) for executing the related story production, and story production control means (for example, for controlling progress of the series of story productions and the related story production executed by the story production execution means) , A sub CPU 71), and the game number counting means sets a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) in the predetermined section to 1 As a set, a set number counting means for counting the number of sets (for example, the processing shown in S459 of FIG. 83) is included, and the story effect control means is controlled to the specific game state counted by the specific game state number counting means. The story is advanced in the series of story production units based on the number of times (for example, the processing shown in S460 of FIG. 83), and in the series of story production based on the set number counted by the set number counting means. A game machine characterized by advancing a story (for example, the processing shown in S460 of FIG. 83).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a story effect (for example, a series of story effects) is generated according to the number of consecutive big villas in the special game state (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter) and the number of sets. It will proceed. Further, in the specific game state, the story effect (for example, related story effect) related to the story effect (for example, a series of story effects) executed in the special game state is executed. Therefore, the story effect can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect control means, in the series of story effects, when the specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result of transitioning to the specific game state. The above-mentioned gaming machine, characterized in that the story effect executing means is caused to execute the related story effect according to a progress degree of a story (for example, a value of a management counter during ST).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the specific game state, a story effect (for example, a related story effect) is performed according to the progress degree of the story effect executed in the special game state. Therefore, without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area, it is possible to perform a story effect with an appropriate relationship between the special game state and the specific game state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the related story effect is an effect for displaying a summary (for example, a synopsis) of the story in the series of story effects according to the progress degree in the series of story effects. The gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses in accordance with the number of consecutive big villas in the special game state (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter), the next series of stories It is possible to perform the related story production in the specific game state with the production content of the production and the production content that does not cause the discrepancy.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means is configured such that, in the series of story effects, a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means. A first image display unit (for example, the set story display area 703) that displays images 703a and 703b) and a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time counted by the set number counting unit in the series of story productions. Second image display means (for example, a scheduled set window display area 704) for displaying a second image (for example, window images 704a and 704b) indicating that the related story production is the series of story productions. The game machine according to the above, which is an effect of displaying the second image and a story (for example, a name scene and a description of the name scene) corresponding to the second image according to the progress degree in.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story productions progresses in accordance with the number of consecutive big villas in the special game state (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter), the next series of stories The related story effect in the specific game state can be performed with the effect content of the effect and the effect content that does not cause a discrepancy, and the second image (for example, the window image) used in the series of story effects is also used in the related story effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the effect image data and secure a larger storage area.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming board) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start opening 32, a second start opening 33), and a variable winning device (for example, the first start provided in the game area, which can be changed into a first mode in which it is easy to receive a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to receive a game medium) A special winning state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player due to the change of the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the special winning opening 36, the second special winning opening 37) and the starting area. Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the game state), and identification information display means for variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special) A pattern display unit 54) and a fluctuation pattern determination unit (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines a fluctuation pattern of the identification information that is variably displayed by the identification information display unit according to the determination result by the specific game state transition determination unit. And, the specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state (for example, the main CPU 61) on condition that the result of the determination to shift to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determining means. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state), after the specific game state ends, a special game state different from the specific game state (for example, ST Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to a game state) and game number counting means (for example, during ST) for counting the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, ST mode story section) in the special game state. Management counter), and a story effect executing means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) for executing a series of story effects in the predetermined section based on the count result by the game number counting means, and the story effect executing means. A game machine including a story effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the series of story effects, wherein the variation pattern determination means determines the specific game state transition in the predetermined section. When the result of the determination to shift to the specific game state is not obtained by the means, the first fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern indicating shortened fluctuation) corresponding to the first fluctuation time (for example, 2 s) High It is possible to determine with a probability, and in the case where the determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state is obtained in the predetermined section, the first variation time longer than the first variation time A second fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating super reach) corresponding to two fluctuation times (for example, 30 s) can be determined, and the game number counting means sets a predetermined number of games in the predetermined section (for example, (5 times) as one set, a set number counting means for counting the number of sets (for example, the processing shown in S459 of FIG. 83), and an in-set game number counting means for counting the number of games in the one set (for example, In-set counter), the story effect control means advances the story in the series of story effects based on the number of sets counted by the set number counting means (for example, shown in S460 of FIG. 83). Process), in the predetermined section, a time (for example, 10 seconds) obtained by multiplying the first variation time by the predetermined number of games is set as a basic effect time, and the set in the series of story effects is based on the basic effect time. If the second variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determination means in the predetermined section by advancing a story (production within the set) corresponding to the number, the counting result by the in-set game number counting means And the remaining effect time is determined based on the basic effect time, and it is determined whether the second variation time is longer than the remaining effect time (for example, the process of S473 in FIG. 84 is performed). At the same time, when it is determined that the second variation time is longer than the remaining effect time (for example, when the determination result of S473 in FIG. 84 is NO), the second variation time of By suggesting the number of sets corresponding to the end by a special production mode (for example, a production mode in which a window image that suggests an intra-set production of a production end target set is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode), the identification is performed. A gaming machine characterized by notifying that a determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state has been obtained by the gaming state shift judging means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the production time of a series of story productions executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol are generally synchronized with a simple configuration, with one set as one unit. Even if it is possible to change to a specific game state (for example, to be a big hit) in the middle of a series of story production games, it is inconsistent as much as possible for the series of story production. It is possible to make a big hit announcement (notice of transition to a specific gaming state) that will be promoted so that the player's interest will be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect control means is a portion corresponding to the number of sets which is a target suggested by the special effect mode in the series of story effects (for example, effect end target set). Regarding the effect within the set), the game machine according to the above is characterized in that control for advancing a story is executed in synchronization with the end of the second fluctuation time.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if it is decided to shift to a specific game state in a game in the middle of story production executed over a plurality of games, there is a discrepancy as much as possible in the story production. It is possible to make a big hit announcement that will be promoted without incurring and that the interest of the player will be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means is configured such that, in the series of story effects, a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current number of sets counted by the set number counting means. A first image display unit (for example, the set story display area 703) that displays images 703a and 703b) and a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time counted by the set number counting unit in the series of story productions. A second image display means (for example, a scheduled set window display area 704) that displays a second image (for example, window images 704a and 704b) indicating that the story production control means is the special production. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second image corresponding to the number of sets which is an object to be suggested by a mode is displayed in a display mode different from a normal mode.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to give a big hit announcement that will be more interesting by using a window image (second image) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time. It will be possible.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming board) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start port 32, second start port 33), and a first variable winning device (for example, a first mode which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium (for example, A first special winning opening 36) and a first area which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium, and a specific area through which the game medium can pass (for example, , A second variable winning device having a specific area 38A) (for example, a second special winning opening 37) and a specific game state advantageous to a player (for example, a game medium having passed through the starting area). , A specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to the big hit gaming state, and a determination result indicating that the specific gaming state transition determining means transitions to the specific gaming state. On the condition that the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and the game medium having passed through the specific region in the specific game state, the specific game. After the state is finished, the special game state is controlled to a special game state (for example, a probability variation/shorter time game state) in which it is relatively easy to obtain the determination result of the transition to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means. With the control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and the specific game state, the first round game execution means capable of executing the first round game for varying the first variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode a predetermined number of times ( For example, in the specific game state with the main CPU 61), a second round game executing means (for example, a main game execution means) capable of executing a second round game for changing the second variable winning device into the first mode and the second mode for a predetermined number of times. CPU 61), music pattern selection means (for example, sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the specific game state is controlled by the specific game state control means, and the music pattern selection A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs a music piece according to the music pattern selected by the means in the special gaming state, and a winning rate determination means that determines a winning rate of the game medium in a predetermined period of the specific gaming state. (For example, a sub CPU 71), and The second round game execution means is capable of performing a specific second round game in which the passage of the game medium to the specific region is relatively easy during the execution of the second round game, and the specific The game state is at least once by the second round game executing means after the first specific number of times (for example, four times 1 to 4R) of the first round game is executed by the first round game executing means. A first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed (for example, a big hit game state according to a hit pattern 3) and the first specific number of times of the first round game by the first round game execution means. And a second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), and the music pattern selection means Can select a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)) when the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, and by the specific game state control means A second musical composition pattern (for example, musical composition pattern A (failure)) can be selected when controlled to the second specific game state, and the winning rate determination is made when the first musical composition pattern is selected. When the winning rate determined by the means is less than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means. When the rate is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the specific first music piece in which the time for outputting the predetermined music piece by the music piece outputting means is relatively shorter than the predetermined first music piece pattern. When selecting a pattern (music pattern A (reverse) short) and selecting the second music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined When a second musical composition pattern (for example, musical composition pattern A (failure) long) is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined second musical piece. The specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short) in which the time for which the predetermined music is output by the music output unit is relatively shorter than the pattern is selected, and the first music is selected. In the pattern, the first common part (for example, A melody of the first section) of the predetermined music is output by the music output unit, and a predetermined branch period (for example, , The first branch section) is a predetermined music pattern to be output after the passage of the predetermined section (for example, the reverse of the fifth section), and the second music pattern is It is a predetermined music pattern that the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branch period has elapsed. When the music pattern selecting unit selects either the first music pattern or the second music pattern, the music output unit determines a predetermined time (for example, the first round when the initial section is started). The output of the predetermined music is started during the waiting time before the start), and the second round game execution means is started at the predetermined time when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. By the above, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, it is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, gaming board 1) through which the gaming medium can pass (for example, a gaming area). , A first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33) and a first mode which is provided in the game area and is easy to accept the game medium and a second mode which is difficult to accept the game medium, and the game medium passes through. It is advantageous to the player on the condition that the variable winning device (for example, the special winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) therein and the game medium have passed through the starting area. A specific game state transition determining means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state), and a purport that the specific game state transition is performed by the specific game state transition determining means. On condition that the determination result of is obtained, a specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and that the game medium has passed through the specific region in the specific game state. As a condition, after the particular game state is finished, a special game state (for example, a probability variation/time saving game state) in which it is relatively easy to obtain a determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state. Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the first variable winning device in the specific game state and the first mode and the second mode, while passing the game medium to the specific region First round game executing means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of executing a first round game which is relatively difficult to perform a predetermined number of times, and the second variable winning device in the first and second modes in the specific game state. A second round game executing means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing a specific second round game for a predetermined number of times, which makes it relatively easy to pass the game medium to the specific area, while changing the mode, and the specific game. A music pattern selection unit (for example, a sub CPU 71) that selects a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when the state control unit controls the specific game state, and a music pattern selected by the music pattern selection unit Music output means (for example, speaker 10) that outputs a music corresponding to the above in the special game state, and winning rate determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) that determines the winning rate of the game medium during the predetermined period of the specific game state. A gaming machine comprising: The state is that the first round game execution means executes the first specific number of times (for example, four times 1 to 4R) of the first round game, and then the second round game execution means performs at least one of the first round game. A first specific game state in which a specific second round game is executed (for example, a big hit game state according to a hit pattern 3) and the first specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means. After being played, a second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), and the music pattern selection means is included. When the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, it is possible to select a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)), and the specific game state control means A second musical composition pattern (for example, musical composition pattern A (failure)) can be selected when controlled to the second specific game state, and when the first musical composition pattern is selected, the winning rate determination means. If the winning rate determined by is less than the predetermined threshold value, a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means. Is equal to or more than the predetermined threshold value, the specific first music pattern in which the time for which the predetermined music is output by the music output means is relatively shorter than the predetermined first music pattern. In the case of selecting (Music pattern A (reverse) short) and selecting the second music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is less than a predetermined threshold value, If the song pattern of No. 2 (for example, song pattern A (failure) long) is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the predetermined second song pattern. Selecting a specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short) in which the time for which the predetermined music is output by the music output means is relatively shorter than that of the first music pattern. Is a predetermined common part of the predetermined music (for example, A melody of the first section) is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section), It is a predetermined music pattern that a specific portion of the music (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) is output, and the second music pattern is the music output. The predetermined common part of the predetermined music is output by the force means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branching period has elapsed, which is a predetermined music pattern, The music output means, regardless of which of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, at a predetermined time (for example, before the start of the first R when the initial section is started). The output of the predetermined music is started from (during the waiting time), and the predetermined time is set by the second round game execution means when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. A gaming machine, characterized in that, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music (for example, in the first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed) and in the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed (for example, The first common part (for example, A melody of the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Then, in the first specific game state, after the lapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific portion of the predetermined song (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) indicating that the specific second round game is executed is output. .. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the specific game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music is started at a predetermined time (for example, the initial section). Since it is configured such that the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro in the initial section) is started from the waiting time before the start of the first R) in which is started, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

Further, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) that matches a player's gaming tendency (game progress speed), and output a predetermined song. Can be more easily synchronized with the end of the big hit game state (specific game state).

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific game state is the second specific number of times (e.g., 8 times 1 to 8R), which is larger than the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means. After the first round game is executed, at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means in a third specific game state (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 1). , A fourth specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game executing means after the second specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game executing means (for example, , A big hit game state according to the hit pattern 7), and the music pattern selection means, when the specific game state control means is controlled to the third specific game state, a third music pattern (for example, , A music pattern A (success) can be selected, and a fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) is selected when the specific game state control means controls the fourth specific game state. It is selectable, and in the case of selecting the third music pattern, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined third music pattern (for example, music If the pattern A (successful) long is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the music output means outputs the predetermined third music pattern rather than the predetermined third music pattern. When a specific third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success) short) in which a predetermined music is output for a relatively short time is selected and the fourth music pattern is selected, When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is less than a predetermined threshold value, a predetermined fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure) long) is selected, and the winning rate determination means determines. When the determined winning rate is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the time when the predetermined music piece is output by the music piece output means is relatively shorter than the predetermined fourth music pattern. Of the third music pattern, the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the predetermined branch is performed. After the period has elapsed, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and a specific branch period (for example, the second melody) is output. It is a predetermined music pattern that the specific portion (for example, the chorus of the third section) of the predetermined music is output after the passage of two branch sections), and the fourth music pattern is the The first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branch period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period is It is a predetermined music pattern that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after a lapse of time, and the music output means includes the third music pattern and the fourth music by the music pattern selecting means. Regardless of which pattern is selected, the output of the predetermined music is started from the predetermined time, and the predetermined time is when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The above is characterized in that the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game executing means. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific game states, the first common part (for example, the first section of the predetermined music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A)) A melody) is output and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is made to elapse. Here, in the first specific game state, a specific portion (for example, reverse of the fifth section) of a predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the predetermined branch period has elapsed is output. However, in the third specific game state or the fourth game state, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch section). ) Is passed. Then, in the third specific game state, after the lapse of the specific branch period, a specific portion of a predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed (for example, the chorus of the third section) is output. .. With this configuration, the player's expectation in the specific game state can be further increased.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupied when the music pattern selection unit selects either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected. The degree of expectation that the third musical piece pattern occupies when the third musical piece pattern or the fourth musical piece pattern is selected by the musical piece pattern selecting means is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described above, which is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupying when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18+17=35/200) is selected. The third music pattern occupying in the case where either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46+16=62/200) rather than the degree of expectation (for example, 18/35) is selected. By configuring the expectation level (for example, 46/62) to be high, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is passed after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section). ) Is output, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game will be executed is relatively high, so the roles of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified, and It is possible to further enhance the player's expectation in the gaming state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and the music pattern selecting unit selects a music pattern corresponding to the first music. In the case, when the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means, rather than the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means, The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means is higher.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific second round game when the music pattern (for example, the music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A) is selected. To the second music (for example, the music corresponding to the music pattern B) rather than the expected degree (for example, the rate at which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected). The degree of expectation that the specific second round game will be executed when the corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected (for example, when the music pattern B is selected, the winning pattern 1 or 3 is determined). It is possible to change the degree of expectation between pieces of music by further increasing the percentage of the player's tune), thereby further enhancing the player's expectation in the specific game state.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming board (for example, a gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming board) provided in the gaming area and through which the gaming medium can pass. 1 start opening 32, a second start opening 33), and a variable winning device (for example, the first start provided in the game area, which can be changed into a first mode in which it is easy to receive a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to receive a game medium) The special winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37), and a specific game state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player due to the change of the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting area. The specific game state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to the game state), and the determination result indicating that the specific game state transition determining means transitions to the specific game state can be obtained. In the condition, a specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific region 38A in the jackpot game state). In the special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 180 times) after the specific game state is finished. (For example, the main CPU 61), after the predetermined number of games are played in the special game state, a normal game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state (for example, A normal game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to a normal game state (non-probable variation/non-time saving), and a specific story in the specific game state, the special game state, and the normal game state. Story production execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) for executing production, and story production control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of production related to the specific story executed by the story production execution means. And the specific story includes at least a first story (for example, a first story) and a second story (for example, a second story), and the story production control unit includes at least the story. A first effect control state in which an effect related to the first story is executed by the effect executing means, and a second effect control in which an effect related to the second story is executed by the story effect executing means. State and said first The production control state transition control means for transitioning from the one production control state to the second production control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, wherein the predetermined transition condition is the specific game in the special game state A game machine characterized by including being controlled to the normal game state by the normal game state control means without being controlled to the specific game state by the state control means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a story effect with appropriate relevance in a plurality of game states, and even when the state advantageous to the player is finished, By advancing the story, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which a gaming medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, gaming board 1) through which the gaming medium can pass (for example, a gaming area). , A first starting opening 32, a second starting opening 33), and a variable winning device (for example, a first mode provided in the game area, which can be changed to a first mode in which it is easy to accept a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to accept a game medium (for example, The first special winning opening 36, the second special winning opening 37) and a specific game state that is advantageous to the player due to the change of the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, , A specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to transition to the big hit gaming state, and a determination result indicating that the specific gaming state transition determining means transitions to the specific gaming state. On the condition that the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state). ) In the case, after the specific game state ends, during a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times), a special game state different from the specific game state (for example, ST game state) is controlled to a special game state. After control means (for example, the main CPU 61) and the predetermined number of games have been played in the special game state, a normal game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state ( For example, a normal game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling to a normal game state (non-probable variation/non-time saving), and a specific story in the specific game state, the special game state, and the normal game state Story effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) that executes related effects, and story effect control means (for example, sub-control) that controls the progress of effects related to the specific story executed by the story effect execution means. CPU71), the specific story includes at least a first story (for example, a first story) and a second story (for example, a second story), and the story production control means is at least A first effect control state in which the story effect execution unit executes an effect related to the first story, and a second effect control unit in which an effect related to the second story is executed by the story effect execution unit. Has a production control state, The production control state transition control means for transitioning from the first production control state to the second production control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, wherein the predetermined transition condition is the specific game state transition control A game machine characterized by being controlled to the specific game state by means, or being controlled to the special game state by the special game state transition control means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform story production with appropriate relevance in a plurality of game states, and when a state advantageous to the player is entered, a specific story proceeds. Therefore, the player's motivation to play can be increased.

The game machine according to the present embodiment is provided with a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area in which a game medium can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first board) provided in the game area and through which the game medium can pass. 1 start opening 32, a second start opening 33), and a variable winning device (for example, the first start provided in the game area, which can be changed into a first mode in which it is easy to receive a game medium and a second mode in which it is difficult to receive a game medium) A special winning state (for example, a big hit) which is advantageous to the player due to the change of the variable winning device on condition that the game medium has passed through the special winning opening 36, the second special winning opening 37) and the starting area. Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the game state), and identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special) for variably displaying identification information. A pattern display unit 54) and a variation pattern determination unit (for example, the main CPU 61) that determines a variation pattern of the identification information that is variably displayed by the identification information display unit according to the determination result by the specific game state transition determination unit. And, the specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state (for example, the main CPU 61) on condition that the result of the determination to shift to the specific game state is obtained by the specific game state transition determining means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state), a predetermined game state for controlling to a predetermined game state different from the specific game state (for example, ST game state) In the predetermined game state, a control means, a set game number counting means (for example, an in-set counter) that counts the number of games in the one set with a predetermined number of games as one set in the predetermined game state, Production execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) that executes a predetermined production (e.g., in-set production) capable of executing a series of productions over the predetermined number of games, and production control that controls the progress of the predetermined production. And a means (for example, a sub CPU 71), the variation pattern determining means, in the predetermined game state, if the determination result that the specific game state transition determination means to shift to the specific game state is not obtained In, it is possible to determine a first variation pattern (for example, shortening variation A) corresponding to a specific variation time (for example, 2 s) with a high probability, and in the predetermined game state, by the specific game state transition determination means. The judgment result that the special game state is to be entered has been obtained. In this case, it is possible to determine a second variation pattern (for example, special variations A to E) different from the first variation pattern, and the effect control means sets the predetermined number of games in the specific variation time. The time (for example, 10 s) multiplied by is set as the basic effect time, and the effect execution means is caused to execute the predetermined effect based on the basic effect time, and the variation pattern determination means is the specific game state in the predetermined game state. If the game state transition determining means has obtained a determination result indicating that the game state is to be shifted to the specific game state, synchronizing with the end of the predetermined effect based on the count result by the in-set game number counting means. The gaming machine characterized in that the second fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time can be determined with high probability.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the effect time of a predetermined effect (for example, effect within the set) and the variation time of the identification symbol, which are suitable for performing a series of effects over a plurality of games, are suitable with a simple configuration. Since it becomes possible to synchronize with, it is possible to shift to a specific game state in a game in the middle of a predetermined effect (being a big hit) without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area. Even if it is decided, it is possible to advance the predetermined effect as much as possible without causing any discrepancy.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. The same or similar components as those of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117 is provided with only one special winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 117, a special winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. Inside the special winning opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the game ball downward is formed. A specific region 38A and a non-specific region 38B are provided at the lower end of the ball passage 37B so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right. A special winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the special winning opening 37 enters the ball passage. The specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39′ that can be displaced left and right is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A and the non-specific region 38B inside the spherical passage 37B. In FIG. 117, the position where the displacement member 39′ is shown by a solid line is the position after displacement, and the position where the displacement member 39′ is shown in a virtual line in FIG. 117 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39′ switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39' is in a fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is performed. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39' forms a gap with the right side wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can sufficiently pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and can pass through the specific area 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39' is in the fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the displacement member 39' and the left side wall of the ball passage 37B. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass through the non-specific area 38B between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'.

In addition, in the case where the specific region is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific region. When the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member that allows the game ball to pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member that prevents the game ball from passing through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be fixed at any one of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, if the displacement member is placed at the second position, the game ball will pass through the specific area without fail if the player wins the special winning opening. Therefore, the game is more advantageous to the player than the embodiment described above. Modes can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39′ is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A. The V winning of is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39' forms a gap with the left side wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39' and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. Become.

Even with a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39', after the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is successful in the jackpot gaming state is completed, it is possible to shift to the probability variation gaming state or the like. That is, according to the special winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117, even if only one special winning opening (variable winning device) is provided, it is relatively difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to execute a one-round game and a specific second-round game in which it is relatively easy to pass a game ball to the specific area 38A, two large winning holes (variable winning a prize device) on the game board. Even if it is difficult to secure a space to install), it is easy to shift to the special gaming state according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific gaming state, or It becomes possible to provide a game machine having a game property of making it difficult.

FIG. 118 is a view showing a special winning opening opening/closing pattern (modification) of the gaming machine according to the other embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the special winning opening opening/closing pattern of FIG. 118. The special winning opening/closing pattern and the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117.

As shown in FIG. 118, the modified example of the special winning opening opening/closing pattern is basically the same as the special winning opening opening/closing pattern shown in FIG. 53, and is applied to one special winning opening provided with a specific region. It is a possible winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a special winning opening opening/closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 119, as an example, the displacement member 39′ for opening/closing the specific area 38A is activated only at the 10th R, and is in the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 117. Become. On the other hand, in the 1st to 9th eyes and the 11th to 16th eyes, the displacement member 39' is in the non-actuated state and is in the position shown by the phantom line in FIG. 117. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a special winning opening opening/closing pattern is applied to one big winning opening, it is possible to achieve the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process, only one special winning opening is provided, but no specific region is provided, the pachinko gaming machine that determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state according to the type of big hit symbol Applied to.

As shown in FIG. 120, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory. In this process, the main CPU, if it is determined that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, if no data is stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is a start memory, it shifts the processing to S1001.

In S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this processing, the main CPU determines whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. The big hit determination table for high probability with a large number of big hit determination values or the low probability for a small number of big hit determination values. Refer to the jackpot determination table of. Further, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random number value in the special symbol starting storage area and the selected big hit determination table, which are extracted when the game ball is won. Then, the main CPU determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. In other words, the main CPU determines whether or not to make a big hit game state advantageous to the player. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, a big hit or a loss is determined. When this process ends, the process moves to S1002.

In S1002, the main CPU determines whether the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, the main CPU moves the process to S1003. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, when it is determined that it is not a big hit, the main CPU moves the process to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot gaming state. That is, the main CPU sets a special winning opening open display command, sets large winning opening open data, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the process proceeds to S1006. When it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the process is moved to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game state which was started in S1003. In other words, in the big hit game state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation big hit, it will shift to the non-probability variation game state after the end. When shifting to such a non-probability variation game state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

In S1006, the main CPU controls the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot gaming state started to be controlled in S1003. That is, in the big hit game state based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, it will be sure to shift to the probability variation game state after the end. When shifting to such a probability variation gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

In the pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, by providing the same effect mode as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game with respect to the round in which the winning of the special winning opening is easy.

<Summary of Invention>
In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-214010), since the movable accessory can be moved between the liquid crystal display area and the liquid crystal display area, the front side of the liquid crystal display device can be moved. It is possible to easily move the movable accessory. By the way, since the installation space of the movable accessory is limited inside the game machine in the first place, when the movable accessory moves even in the standby position inside the game machine, the installation of the movable accessory at the standby position is performed. It is difficult to secure space.

In particular, since the size and number of the movable accessory are determined according to the space that the gaming machine has, if the space that the gaming machine has can be effectively utilized, the movable accessory can be enlarged and the effect produced by the movable accessory can be improved. It can be further enhanced.

A game machine according to the present invention includes a game board (1) having a game area (1p) in which a game medium rolls, and a movable accessory provided on the game board and movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. (Lower movable effect member 101B), a winning opening (first starting opening 32) which is provided on the game board so as to be positioned in front of the movable accessory, and can win a game medium, and passes through the winning opening. And a game medium passage (ball passages 203, 204, 206) for discharging the game medium from the front of the movable accessory through the lower side of the movable accessory to the back surface of the game board. In the position, it is possible to execute a movable effect of moving in the game medium passage direction at least below the movable accessory, and in a state in which the movable accessory is movable in the standby position, the game medium passage has the movable accessory. Is provided so as to pass below the movable accessory from above.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, since the game medium passage is provided so as to pass below the movable accessory from the front of the movable accessory in the state where the movable accessory is moved in the standby position, it is movable in the standby position. It is possible to secure a space in which the accessory can move. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance of the movable accessory while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

Further, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, it is possible to enlarge the movable accessory and expand the movable range of the movable accessory at the standby position, thereby more effectively enhancing the performance of the movable accessory. be able to.

Furthermore, by disposing the winning opening in front of the movable winning object, it becomes possible for the player who visually recognizes the winning opening during the game to see the movable winning object present behind the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable accessory to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the movable accessory performs a movable effect in which the movable accessory is movable so as to expand in the radial direction at the standby position.
With this configuration, the movable range of the movable accessory can be expanded, and the effect of the movable accessory can be more effectively improved.

In particular, when the movable accessory is moved at the standby position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass from the front of the movable accessory to the lower side of the movable accessory, so that a large space in which the movable accessory can move at the standby position. Therefore, the movable accessory can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the movable accessory can be dynamically moved, and the performance of the movable accessory can be enhanced more effectively.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) in which a gaming medium rolls, and is provided behind the gaming board, and moves to a standby position and a movable position. A movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) that is movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect, and a prize that is provided on the game board so as to be positioned in front of the movable accessory and that allows a game medium to win. A gaming machine having a mouth (first starting opening 32) and a game medium passage (ball passages 203, 204, 206) for discharging the game medium won in the winning opening through the front of the movable accessory. The movable accessory has a plurality of movable portions (outer ring members 117) that are separated from each other through a gap (121) in the circumferential direction, and at the standby position, the movable portion passes through the gap in the circumferential direction. Is provided so as to be movable between a first position and a second position that are separated from each other in the radial direction, and the game medium passage is provided so as to pass through the gap.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, since the game medium discharge passage is provided so as to pass through the gap of the movable portion of the movable accessory, it is possible to secure a space in which the movable accessory can move at the standby position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance of the movable accessory while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

Further, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory and expand the movable accessory at the standby position, and it is possible to more effectively enhance the performance of the movable accessory. ..

Furthermore, by disposing the winning opening in front of the movable winning object, it becomes possible for the player who visually recognizes the winning opening during the game to see the movable winning object present behind the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable accessory to the player.

In addition to this, since the game medium passage can be installed in front of the movable accessory while avoiding the movable part, the game board can be prevented from becoming large in the vertical direction, and the installation space of the game board can be reduced.

In order to achieve the above object, a game machine according to the present invention is provided with a game board (1) having a game area (1p) in which a game medium rolls, and a standby position and a movable position provided behind the game board. A movable winning object (lower movable effect member 101B) that is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to and, and a first winning opening (provided on the game board and capable of winning a game medium) ( A game machine having a first starting opening 32) and a second winning opening (general winning openings 40A to 40C) provided on the game board and capable of winning a game medium, wherein the first winning opening The first passages (ball passages 204, 206) through which the game media won in the above are discharged through the lower part of the movable accessory, and the game media in which the second prize holes are discharged through the lower part of the movable accessory. A first passage that is provided in the first passage and a second passage (ball passage 212) that passes through the first passage and that detects the game medium that rolls in the first direction. Sensor (first starting opening switch 320) and a second sensor (general winning opening sensor) provided in the second passage and detecting a game medium rolling in a second direction different from the first direction. 400A), the first sensor is installed in front of the second sensor, and is located below the movable accessory between the first passage and the second passage. Is provided with a magnetic detection sensor (magnetic sensor 214), and the first passage and the second passage have a structure in which a downstream region where the game medium is discharged joins.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first passage is provided with the first sensor for detecting the game medium rolling in the first direction, and the second passage is provided with the second sensor different from the first direction. A second sensor for detecting the game medium rolling in the direction of is provided, and the first passage and the second passage merge with the downstream region where the game medium is discharged, so that, for example, the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. It is possible to install the first passage and the second passage in different directions such as directions, and join the first passage and the second passage.

In addition to this, the first sensor is installed in front of the second sensor, and the magnetic detection sensor is provided below the movable accessory between the first passage and the second passage. Three sensors including the first sensor, the second sensor, and the magnetic detection sensor can be installed in a small space below the movable accessory.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance of the movable accessory while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

Moreover, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the movable accessory can be made larger, and the performance of the movable accessory can be more effectively enhanced.

The game machine according to the present invention is provided with a game board (1) having a game area (1p) in which a game medium rolls, and provided behind the game board, and is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. Movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B), a winning opening (first starting opening 32) provided on the game board and capable of winning the game medium, and the game medium winning the winning opening is discharged downstream. A winning opening unit (first starting opening member 202) having an upstream game medium passage (203, 204) and a light-emitting decorative substrate (215), and a game medium discharged to the upstream game medium passage, A game medium passage portion (ball passage unit 205) in which a downstream game medium passage (ball passage 206) for discharging through the lower part of the movable accessory is formed, and the downstream game medium provided in the downstream game medium passage. A game machine provided with a game medium detection member (first starting opening switch 320) for detecting a game medium passing through a passage, and a wiring (cable 216) connected to the electric circuit board, wherein the game medium is detected. A support part (projection 217) provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage part so as to be located above the member and supporting the wiring extending from the illumination board, and the movable part so as to cover above the support part. The cover member (semi-cylindrical member 219) provided between the accessory and the game medium passage portion is provided.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the upstream game medium passage and the downstream game medium passage can be passed from the front of the movable accessory to the lower portion of the movable accessory to secure a space in which the movable accessory can move. can do. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance of the movable accessory while securing a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

Moreover, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the movable accessory can be made larger, and the performance of the movable accessory can be more effectively enhanced.

In addition, the wiring extending from the decorative board is a movable accessory because it has a supporting portion which is provided above the game medium detecting member and is provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage and supports the wiring extending from the decorative board. It is possible to prevent flapping down. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring from interfering with the movable accessory when the movable accessory is moved, the movable object can be smoothly moved, and the wiring can be protected from the movable accessory.

Furthermore, since the covering member is provided between the movable accessory and the game medium passage portion so as to cover the upper part of the support portion, the wiring and the movable accessory can be shielded by the covering member, and the wiring can be provided when the movable accessory moves. It is possible to more effectively prevent the interference with the movable accessory. Further, by colliding the game medium with the covering member when the game medium flows down from the movable accessory side, it is possible to prevent the game medium from colliding with the wiring and protect the wiring from the game medium.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the support portion includes a U-shaped protrusion (217) protruding from the upper surface of the game medium passage portion, and the wiring is supported by the protrusion by a binding member. Is preferred.

With this configuration, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the wiring can be firmly fastened to the protrusion by a binding member such as a binding band, and the wiring can be more effectively prevented from flapping below the movable accessory.

Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document (JP 2010-214010A), the movable accessory only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the liquid crystal display area, and the movable accessory does not move. , It does not move in the standby position. As a result, the effect produced by the movable accessory cannot be further enhanced.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) that is movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory has a first movable body (movable body 106) that is movable in one direction and the other direction by rotation of a driving member (motor 110A), and a pressing portion (107C). A second movable body (movable body 107) movably provided on the movable body and movable in the one direction and the other direction together with the first movable body, and the second direction together with the second movable body. An interlocking portion (arm member) that has a third movable body (movable body 108) movable to the inside and a guide hole (112A), is swingably provided on the first movable body, and can be pressed by the pressing portion. 112), a first fitting part (fitting protrusion 114A) and a plurality of slits (114B) fitted to the interlocking part, and a rotating member (rotating member) provided rotatably on the third movable body. Body 114) and a second fitting portion (fitting protrusion 115A) that fits into the plurality of slits, and is movable at least in the radial direction of the rotating member by rotation of the rotating member (slider). A movable member (109) having a member 115 and an outer ring member 117), and in the state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position, the first movable member is rotated by rotating the drive member forward from the initial position. The movable body and the second movable body in the one direction to convert the swing of the interlocking portion into rotation of the rotating member in one direction, and at least the movable portion is allowed while allowing only rotation of the rotating member. By moving the drive member in the radial direction and rotating the drive member in the opposite direction from the initial position, the first movable body is moved in the other direction to swing the interlocking portion to rotate the rotary member in the one direction. While being converted, the third movable body is moved in the other direction to move the movable accessory to the movable position, and the movable portion is moved at least in the radial direction.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, two different effects such as an effect of moving the movable accessory at the standby position and an effect of moving the movable accessory while moving from the standby position to the movable position are set in the rotation direction of the single drive member. It can be easily performed only by switching, and the performance of the movable accessory can be further enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document (JP 2010-214010A), the movable accessory is capable of emitting light, but when a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided separately from the movable accessory. Since it is necessary to separately provide a light emitting portion on the decorative member, the manufacturing cost of the light emitting element increases.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) movable between a standby position and a movable position, and a full-color game provided on the movable accessory. A first light emitting portion (LED 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a) which is a light emitting body, a colored lens member (front decoration 160) provided on the movable accessory and located in front of the first light emitting portion, A decorative member (99) provided in front of the movable accessory positioned at the standby position and capable of transmitting at least rear light forward, and provided behind the decorative member and emitting light to the decorative member. A second light emitting portion (LED 291) that is a monochromatic light emitting body is provided, and the first light emitting portion emits light in a state in which the movable accessory is located at the standby position, so that the first light emitting portion is visually recognized from the front. It is possible to change the color of the movable accessory to a color similar to the emission color of the second light emitting unit, and when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decorative member The color of the decorative member viewed from the front can be changed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first light emitting unit emits light in a state in which the movable accessory is located at the standby position, so that the color of the movable accessory visible from the front is changed to that of the second light emitting unit. Since it is possible to change the color to the same color as the luminescent color, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting portion on the decorative member, and the movable member can cause the decorative member to emit light. In addition to this, it is possible to reduce the mounting amount of the full-color first light emitting unit and to emit light of the same color to the decorative member. As a result, the structure of the decorative member can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member can be reduced.

Further, since it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the light emitting portion on the decorative member, a sufficient space for the depth of the decorative member can be secured.
Further, when the movable accessory is in the state of being moved from the standby position to the movable position, it is possible to change the color of the decorative member visually recognized from the front of the decorative member, so that it is possible to perform various color effects by the movable accessory. It is possible to improve the performance of the movable accessory.

Further, for example, if an effect of moving the movable accessory from the standby position to the movable position while emitting light is performed, the movable accessory that moves while emitting the line of sight of the player can be focused. As a result, the effect of the movable accessory can be emphasized.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (JP 2010-214010A), the movable accessory only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the liquid crystal display area, and it depends on the movable accessory. The production is monotonous. Therefore, the effect of the movable accessory cannot be enhanced.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that is movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory is provided so as to be movable relative to the first movable base (rear side movable base 163) movably provided, and a plurality of movable members (upper left blade member). 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175) are provided on the first movable base and a second movable base (front movable base 164) swingably supported. A first engagement portion (engagement protrusion 163D) and the second movable base are movably provided, and the movable member is moved to the first position and the first position by moving with respect to the second movable base. A third movable base (blade movable rack 165) that swings to the position 2 and a second engagement portion (which is provided on the third movable base and is engageable with the first engagement portion ( And a biasing member (coil spring 171) having one end attached to the second movable base and the other end attached to the third movable base. When moving from the standby position to the movable position, the first movable base and the second movable base move so as to extend relatively, and the second engagement portion moves to the first movable base. By engaging with the engaging portion of, the third movable base is moved to swing the movable member from the first position to the second position, and the movable member is moved from the movable position to the standby position. In this case, the biasing member biases the third movable base so that the movable member swings from the second position to the first position.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the first movable base and the second movable base move so as to extend relatively to each other. By engaging the engaging portion with the first engaging portion, the third movable base is moved to swing the movable member from the first position to the second position. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance of the movable accessory with a simple configuration.

Further, when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position, the biasing member biases the third movable base so that the movable member swings from the second position to the first position. Therefore, the movable member can be quickly returned from the second position to the first position. Thereby, the performance of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that is movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, and the movable accessory. The movable accessory includes a plurality of movable members (an upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a right member) provided with a decorative member (99) provided on the front side. A lower wing member 175) and a light emitting unit (LED 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a) provided on the plurality of movable members, wherein the plurality of movable members are in the standby position. The longitudinal direction extends in the first direction behind the decorative member, and the light emitting portion is configured to emit light toward the decorative member, and the movable accessory is moved from the standby position to the first position. When it is moved to the movable position, it has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction moves in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction and approaches the second direction.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the standby position is located behind the decorative member, the longitudinal direction extends in the first direction, and the light emitting portion is configured to emit light toward the decorative member, When the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the plurality of movable members move closer to each other in the second direction whose longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the first direction, and thus enhance the performance of the movable accessory. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the movable member has an adsorption member that generates an adsorption force, the movable member opposes in the left-right direction when moved in the second direction, and It is preferable that they are adsorbed by the adsorbing member and united.

With this configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is joined in a state where the movable member is attracted when the movable member moves in the second direction, so that the joined state of the movable member can be stably maintained. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the movable member from swinging, and to more effectively enhance the performance of the movable accessory.

A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) operable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory has a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) so that at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member. When the plurality of main body members overlap, the overlap of the plurality of main body members increases, and when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member, the overlap of the plurality of main body members decreases. A moving mechanism (a rack 162A, gears 169A to 169E, a protrusion 164A) for moving the one main body member toward or away from the other main body member, and the one main body member to the other main body member. A movable member (an upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a right member) which can be swung between a first position and a second position as they move toward and away from each other. Lower blade member 175), and the plurality of main body members have guide portions extending along the extending direction of the respective main body members, and the first guide portion (guide surface 163v, at least one main body member). 163w) and the second guide portions (guide surfaces 164v, 164w) of the main body member different from the one main body member are provided so as to face each other, and the first guide portion and the second A protrusion (lower stoppers 163x, 163y) is provided on at least one end portion in the extending direction of the guide portion of the first guide portion and the second guide portion. Then, as the movable accessory moves toward the movable position from the standby position, the guide portion facing the protrusion has a distance between the protrusion and the guide portion facing the protrusion. Which has an inclined surface (190b, 191b) such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed, and when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the projecting portion and the guide portion facing the projecting portion. And the movable member swings from the first position to the second position.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion becomes the smallest, so that the movable accessory moves from the standby position. By moving to the position, the overlapping of the plurality of main body members is small (a state where the plurality of main body members relatively extend), and when the ends in the extending direction of the plurality of main body members overlap with each other in a short length, The main body members can be firmly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the movable accessory moves to the movable position.

Furthermore, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide portion of the main body member on the other side can be moved along the inclined surface. As a result, the main body members can be smoothly moved to a state in which they overlap with each other and a state in which they overlap with each other (a state in which the plurality of body members are relatively contracted), and as a result, a smooth operation of the movable accessory is achieved. It can be carried out.

Further, when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion becomes the shortest, and the movable member moves from the first position to the second position. Since it swings to, the performance of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (JP 2010-214010 A), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is to the movable accessory. It is unknown how they are wired.

This makes it impossible to know how the wiring and the members such as gears that drive the movable accessory are laid out when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner. I can't know if they can move smoothly.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory that is operable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, and the movable accessory includes a plurality of movable accessories. It has a main body member (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164), and when at least one main body member of the plurality of main body members moves to approach the other main body member, the main body members overlap. Is larger and at least one of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member, the overlap of the main body members becomes smaller, and the plurality of one main body members are different from each other. A moving mechanism (rack 162A, gear 169A, gears 169B to 169E, protrusion 164A) for moving the member toward or away from the member, and moving the one body member toward or away from another body member. And a movable member ((an upper left blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175)) that can swing to a first position and a second position. A light emitting portion (LED 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a) capable of emitting light, and a wiring (flexible cable 186) connected to the light emitting portion, the wiring being the one main body member and the other main body. It is locked to a member and is bent and wired between the one body member and the other body member, and the moving mechanism is one of the one body member and the other body member. Is placed on one side of the central axis in the width direction and the wiring is placed on the other side.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, since the wiring is locked to the one main body member and the other main body member, and is bent and wired between the one main body member and the other main body member, When one main body member moves toward or away from another main body member, the wiring can be smoothly moved while preventing the main body member from floating with respect to the plurality of main body members.

Further, the moving mechanism is installed on one side of the one main body member or the other main body member with the width direction central axis interposed therebetween, and the wiring is installed on the other side, so that the wiring does not interfere with the moving mechanism. At the same time, one body member and the other body member can be moved relative to each other. Thereby, the wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (JP 2010-214010 A), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is to the movable accessory. It is unknown how they are wired.

As a result, when the movable accessory moves intricately, it is not possible to know in what state the wiring is accommodated in the movable accessory, and the wiring accommodated in the movable accessory is accommodated in the accommodation accessory. May flap inside.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that is movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory includes a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) that move relative to each other, wiring (flexible cable 186) attached to the plurality of main body members, and a plurality of the plurality of main body members. A protrusion (198) provided on at least one of the main body members of the movable body, the movable accessory being entirely overlapped so that the plurality of main body members relatively contract in the standby position, In the movable position, the plurality of main body members partially overlap each other so as to extend relatively, and the wiring is bent between the main body members when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position. It is housed as a container and is bent by being pressed against the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position, the movable accessory is bent and accommodated between the main body members, and is bent by being pressed against the protruding portion, The wiring that is folded and accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protruding portion.

This makes it possible to increase the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, prevent the piping from fluttering between the main body members, and connect the wiring to the main body member. Can be stably accommodated during.

Furthermore, by further bending the wiring by the protruding portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force that tends to extend straight from the bent state of the wiring. Therefore, the frictional force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased to more effectively prevent the wiring from flapping between the main body members, and the wiring can be more stably accommodated in the main body member.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (JP 2010-214010A), when the movable accessory moves from inside the liquid crystal display area to outside the liquid crystal display area, rattling of the movable accessory occurs. Not configured to prevent.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 100) operable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory has a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) so that at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member. The overlap of the main body members increases, and the overlap of the main body members decreases when at least one main body member of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member. The member has a guide portion extending along the extending direction of each main body member, and a main body different from the first guide portion (guide surfaces 163v, 163w) in at least one main body member and the one main body member. The second guide portions (guide surfaces 164v, 164w) of the member are provided so as to face each other, and an end of at least one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion in the extending direction. Is provided with a protrusion (lower stoppers 163x, 163y), which is the other one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion, and the guide portion facing the protrusion is the other. As the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position, the distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion, which is a distance, is gradually reduced. (190b, 191b).

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, as the movable accessory moves toward the movable position from the standby position in the guide portion facing the protrusion, the distance between the protrusion and the guide portion facing the protrusion is increased. Is provided with an inclined surface such that the separation distance is gradually reduced. Accordingly, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the gap between the projecting portion and the guide portion of the mating body member facing the projecting portion can be reduced.

As a result, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the overlapping of the plurality of main body members is small (the plurality of main body members relatively extend), and the ends of the plurality of main body members in the extending direction are reduced. When overlapping with a short length, a plurality of body members can be firmly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling when the movable accessory moves to the movable position.

Furthermore, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide portion of the main body member on the other side can be moved along the inclined surface. Accordingly, it is possible to smoothly move the main body members to a state in which the main body members overlap with each other and a state in which the main body members overlap with each other (a state in which the plurality of main body members relatively shrink).

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (JP 2010-214010 A), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is to the movable accessory. It is unknown how they are wired. Therefore, no consideration is given to reducing the load applied to the wiring.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 100) that is movable to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory includes a main body member (case 161), a flexible cable 186 provided on the main body member, and a wiring board (relay board 185) connected to the wiring, and the main body member is the wiring And a second groove (guide groove 187) which is orthogonal to the extending direction of the first groove and in which the wiring is fitted (guide groove 188). ) And the first groove is connected to the wiring board and the wiring at one end (187a) in the extending direction located at the connection position and the other end in the extending direction communicating with the second groove. The wiring has a bottom surface (187c) inclined toward the portion (187b), and the wiring has the other end in the extending direction of the first groove and one end (188a) in the extending direction of the second groove. It has a configuration in which it is fastened to the main body member by a fastening member (189) at a position where and communicate with each other.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first groove extends from one end in the extending direction located at the connection position between the wiring board and the wiring to the other end in the extending direction communicating with the second groove. Since it has the inclined bottom surface, the wiring fitted in the first groove can be extended to the second groove along the inclined bottom surface of the first groove.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the one end portion in the extending direction of the first groove located at the connection position between the wiring and the wiring substrate has a steep inclination (for example, a step having a 90° inclination), the wiring is bent. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the connection position between the wiring and the wiring board and protect the wiring.

Further, the wiring is fastened to the main body member by the fastening member at the position where the other end of the first groove in the extending direction and the one end of the second groove in the extending direction communicate with each other. It is possible to prevent the wiring from fluttering at the bent position where the groove and the second groove communicate with each other.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (JP 2010-214010 A), it is considered that wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light emitting substrate, but the wiring is to the movable accessory. It is unknown how they are wired.

This makes it impossible to know how the wiring and the members such as gears that drive the movable accessory are laid out when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner. I can't know if they can move smoothly.

Furthermore, when the movable accessory moves intricately, it is impossible to know in what state the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable accessory, and the wiring accommodated in the movable accessory does not appear. It may flutter inside.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) that is movable so as to perform a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory is movable with respect to a fixed base (162) having a first rack (rack 162A) formed with a first concavo-convex portion (rack teeth 162a) continuous in the longitudinal direction. A first movable base (rear) provided with a first gear (gear 169A) meshing with the first uneven portion and a second gear (gears 169B to 169E) to which power is transmitted from the first gear. Side movable base 163), a second rack (protruding portion 164A) having a second concave and convex portion (rack tooth 164a) continuously meshing with the second gear in the longitudinal direction, and a first engaging portion. (Engagement protrusion 163D), and a second movable base (front movable base 164) that is relatively movable between a position relatively extending and a position relatively contracting with respect to the first movable base. And a third movable base (slippingly provided on the second movable base and having a second engaging portion (engaging protrusion 165G) engageable with the first engaging portion). The movable blade rack 165) and the second movable base, and a movable member (upper left blade) which is swingable between a first position and a second position as the third movable base slides. The member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175), the light emitting unit (LEDs 181a to 184a) provided on the movable member, and the wiring (flexible cable) connected to the light emitting unit. 186) and a protrusion (198) provided on at least one of the fixed base, the first movable base, and the second movable base, and when the movable accessory is in the movable position. , The fixed base, the first movable base, and the second movable base are relatively extended so that the end of the first movable base and the end of the second movable base overlap with each other. The wiring is extended from the fixed base to the second movable base by being bent from the fixed base by the first movable base by being locked to the fixed base and the second movable base. The first gear and the second gear are wired, and the first gear and the second gear are installed on one side with the central axis in the extending direction of the first movable base interposed therebetween, and the wiring is provided on the first movable base. It is arranged on the other side of the central axis in the extending direction, and the movable accessory is in the standby position. Sometimes, the wiring is bent and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and is pressed against the protruding portion. It has a structure that bends.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the wiring is locked to the fixed base and the second movable base, so that the fixed base is bent at the first movable base and extends to the second movable base. Since the wiring is provided, when the first movable base and the second movable base move to the relatively extended position and the relatively contracted position, the wiring is provided to the first movable base and the second movable base. It is possible to smoothly move the wiring while preventing the wiring from floating.

The first gear and the second gear are installed on one side of the first movable base with the central axis of the extending direction interposed therebetween, and the wiring is provided on the other side of the wiring with the central axis of the first movable base extending therebetween. Since the wiring is prevented from interfering with the first gear and the second gear, the first movable base and the second movable base contract relative to the extended position. Can be moved to any position. Thereby, the wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

Further, when the movable accessory is in the standby position, the wiring is folded and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and the wiring is projected. Since the wire is bent by being pressed against the shaped portion, the wiring folded and accommodated in the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protruding portion.

This makes it possible to increase the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, prevent the wiring from fluttering inside the main body member, and Can be stably accommodated.

Furthermore, by further bending the wiring by the protruding portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force that tends to extend straight from the bent state of the wiring. Therefore, the frictional force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased, and the wiring can be more effectively prevented from fluttering inside the main body member, and the wiring can be more stably accommodated in the main body member.

Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-79356), the gaming balls won from a plurality of gaming medium winning openings merge in one ball passage and are discharged to the discharging opening. When the number of game balls passing through the ball passage per unit time increases in order to reduce the game speed, there is a high possibility that the game balls won from the game medium winning port will contact at the confluence of the ball passage. Therefore, it is expected that the game ball will be blocked in the ball passage, and the game is likely to be interrupted.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first game medium winning opening (general winning opening 40A) in which a game medium can be won and at least one second game medium winning opening (general winning in which a game medium can be won). 40B, 40C), a first game medium passage (ball passage 208) through which the game medium won in the first game medium winning opening is discharged downstream, and a game won in the second game medium winning opening. A game machine provided with at least one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 209, 210) for discharging a medium downstream, wherein the second game medium passage is the second game medium winning prize. A structure in which the passage area, which is an area of a cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes, is larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, which is merged with the first game medium passage downstream of the mouth. Have.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second game medium passage merges with the first game medium passage downstream of the second game medium winning opening, and the passage area thereof is the first game medium passage. Since it is larger than the passage area of No. 1, even if the number of game media passing through the game medium passage per unit time is increased in order to reduce the game speed, It is possible to prevent the game medium won from the second game medium winning port from being jammed in the downstream of the second game medium winning port. As a result, the game medium can be smoothly discharged downstream, and the playability can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width of the second game medium passage in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the first game medium passage in the front-rear direction.

In this way, for example, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board, winning from the first game medium winning port and the second game medium winning port It is possible to prevent the played game medium from being jammed downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the vertical width of the second game medium passage is larger than the vertical width of the first game medium passage.

By doing this, for example, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the front-rear direction of the game board, winning from the first game medium winning port and the second game medium winning port It is possible to prevent the played game medium from being jammed downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the width of the second game medium passage in the front-rear direction is larger than the width of the first game medium passage in the front-rear direction.

In this way, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board, the game won from the first game medium winning port and the second game medium winning port is prevented. It is possible to prevent the medium from being blocked downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the vertical width of the second game medium passage is larger than the vertical width of the first game medium passage.

In this way, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the front-rear direction of the game board, the game won from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening It is possible to prevent the medium from being blocked downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first winning opening (first big winning opening 254) in which a game medium can be won and at least one second winning opening (second in which a gaming medium can be won). A special winning opening 255), a first game medium passage (ball passage 263) for discharging the game medium that has won the first winning opening, and at least a discharging game medium that has won the second winning opening. A game machine having one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 259), wherein the second game medium passage is the first game medium passage downstream of the second winning opening. A passage area, which is a cross-sectional area orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes, is formed to be larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, and the first game medium passage is formed. In addition to the merging portion of the, a communication portion (ball passage 264) that communicates with the first game medium passage is provided, and the game medium that has won the first winning opening is the second communication medium through the communication portion. It has a structure that can be discharged to the game medium passage.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second game medium passage merges with the first game medium passage downstream of the second winning opening and has a cross section orthogonal to the direction in which the game medium passes. The passage area, which is an area, is formed to be larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, and communicates with the first game medium passage separately from the confluence portion with the first game medium passage. It has a communication part. In addition, since the game medium that has won the first winning opening can also be discharged to the first game medium passage through the communication section, it is possible that the game medium that has won from the first winning opening will be blocked downstream. It can be prevented. As a result, the game medium can be smoothly discharged downstream, and the playability can be improved.

1 gaming board 1p gaming area 4 liquid crystal display device 32 first starting opening (winning hole, first winning hole))
33 2nd starting opening 36 1st big winning opening 36A 1st big winning opening shutter 37 2nd big winning opening 37 2nd big winning opening shutter 38A specific area 38B non-specific area 39, 39' Displacement member 40A general winning opening (first (2 prize holes, 1st game medium prize hole)
40B General prize hole (second prize hole, second game medium prize hole)
40C General prize hole (second prize hole, second game medium prize hole)
61 Main CPU
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 payout device 99 decorative member 101A upper movable effect member (movable accessory)
101B Lower movable effect member (movable accessory)
106 movable body (first movable body)
107 movable body (second movable body)
108 Movable body (third movable body)
109 movable member 110A motor (driving member)
112 Arm member (interlocking part)
114 Rotating body (rotating member)
114A fitting protrusion (first fitting part)
114B Slit 115A Fitting projection (second fitting part)
115 Slider member (movable part)
117, 117A Outer ring member (movable part)
121 Gap 160 Front decoration (lens member)
160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a LED (light emitting part, first light emitting part)
161 Case (main body member)
162 Fixed base (fixed base)
162A rack (first rack, moving mechanism) 162a rack tooth (first uneven portion)
163 Rear movable base (main body member, first movable base)
163D engagement protrusion (first engagement portion)
163v, 163w guide surface (first guide portion)
164v, 164w guide surface (second guide portion)
163x, 163y Lower stopper (projection part)
164 Front movable base (main body member, second movable base)
164A Projection (second rack, moving mechanism)
164a Rack tooth (second uneven portion)
165 blade movable rack (third movable base)
165G Engagement protrusion (second engagement part)
169A gear (first gear, moving mechanism)
169B to 169E Gears (second gear, moving mechanism)
171 Coil spring (biasing member)
172 Left upper blade member 172 (movable member)
173 Upper right blade member (movable member)
174 Lower left blade member (movable member)
175 Lower right blade member (movable member)
185 Relay board (wiring board)
186 Flexible cable (wiring)
187 guide groove (first groove)
188 guide groove (second groove)
190,191 Guide protrusion (projection)
190a, 191a Inclined surface 197A, 197B Magnet (adsorption member)
198 Projection 203 Ball passage (upstream side game medium passage, game medium passage)
204 ball passage (upstream side game medium passage, first passage, game medium passage)
202 First starting opening member (prize opening unit)
205 ball passage unit (game medium passage section)
206 ball passage (downstream side game medium passage, first passage, game medium passage)
208 ball passage (first game medium passage)
209 ball passage (second game medium passage)
210 Ball Passage (Second Game Media Passage)
212 Ball Passage (Second Passage)
214 Magnetic sensor (Magnetic detection sensor)
215 Illuminated board 216 Cable (wiring)
217 Protrusion (Support)
219 Semi-cylindrical member (cover member)
254 First prize hole (first prize hole)
255 2nd prize hole (2nd prize hole)
259 ball passage (second game medium passage)
263 ball passage (first game medium passage)
264 ball passage (communication part)
291 LED (second light emitting unit)
320 First start opening switch (first sensor, game medium detection member)
400A General winning prize left switch (second sensor)

Claims (1)

Specific game state determination means for determining whether or not to execute a specific game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production content determination means for determining the content of the production for notifying the determination result of the specific game state determination means,
Effect display means for executing the effect determined by the effect content determining means,
Production control means for controlling the production executed by the production display means,
And a specific display determining means for determining a specific display whether or not to display the effect display means for indicating that the contents of the effect varies executed by the effect display means,
The production being executed can change the contents of the production based on the specific display,
The effect content determination means,
It is possible to determine each of the expected degree types to be executed among a plurality of expected degree types having a plurality of stages that can be executed in one game ,
The specific display is defined corresponding to each of the expected degree types,
The effect control means,
When it is not decided to display the specific display by the specific display determination means, and the expected degree type determined by the effect content determination means is an expected degree type of a specific step, the specific step The performance corresponding to the expected degree type of
In the case of displaying the specific display, if the expected degree type determined by the effect content determination means is an expected degree type of the specific stage, the content of the effect is not based on the specific display. It is possible to change to an expected degree type of a stage lower than the expected degree type of a specific stage, and then to change the content of the effect to the expected degree type of the specific stage based on the specific display. Machine.

Images